NISSAN 2021 Titan Warrior Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for NISSAN models including: 2021 Titan Warrior

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

nissan, titan, 2021, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, gas, service, maintenance

nissan;, titan;, 2021;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, gas;, service;, maintenance

owner's manual and maintenance information - Dealer E

Owners Manual - Dealer E Process

section of the “WHEELS AND TIRES” section in the “Do-it-yourself” section in the 2021 NISSAN Titan. Owner's Manual. Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Checking tire pressure 1. Removethevalvestemcapfromthetire. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem.Do not press too hard or force the valve stem ...

Not Your Device? Search For Manuals / Datasheets:

File Info : application/pdf, 638 Pages, 4.31MB

Document

2021-Nissan-Titan

2021 TITAN
OWNER'S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the "Checking tire pressure" section of the "WHEELS AND TIRES" section in the "Do-it-yourself" section in the 2021 NISSAN Titan Owner's Manual.
Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.
Printing: July 2020 Publication No. SU21EA 0A61U0

Checking tire pressure

LDI0393

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size
Front Original Tire: 265/70R18 P265/70R18 P275/60R20 P275/70R18 LT245/75R17 LT275/65R18 LT265/60R20

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
270 kPa, 39 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi

Size
Rear Original Tire: 265/70R18 P265/70R18 P275/60R20 P275/70R18 LT245/75R17 LT275/65R18 LT265/60R20
Spare Tire Sizes: 265/70R18 P265/70R18 P275/70R18 P275/60R20 LT245/75R17 LT275/65R18 LT265/60R20

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
270 kPa, 39 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 500 kPa, 73 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 480 kPa, 70 psi
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure 270 kPa, 39 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 500 kPa, 73 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 480 kPa, 70 psi

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

FOREWORD

READ FIRST--THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
· NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
· ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
· ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
· ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat (if so equipped).
· ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
· ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive

models, a

mark is placed at the be-

ginning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. For additional information, see "Driving safety precautions" (P. 5-10).

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident.
For additional information, see "Onpavement and off-road driving precautions" (P. 5-8), "Avoiding collision and roll-over" (P. 5-9) and "Driving safety precautions" (P. 5-10).

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https:// owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in

your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner's Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen."

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: "Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/".

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

© 2020 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information:

tion at:

you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

Your name, address, and telephone number
Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the

For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003

For U.S. customers

driver's side)

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

Date of purchase Current odometer reading

or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

Your NISSAN dealer's name Your comments or questions
OR

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of

Illustrated table of contents

contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

5. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-53) 6. Occupant classification sensors (weight
sensors) (if so equipped) (P. 1-53) 7. Front seats (P. 1-2) 8. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-53) 9. Rear seats (if so equipped) (P. 1-16) 10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (if so equipped) (P. 1-28) 11. Top tether strap anchor (if so equipped) (P. 1-28) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, King Cab® model similar.

1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear outboard seats) (if so equipped) (P. 1-16)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

LII2479
3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-15) 4. Front seat belts with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-16, 1-53)

EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Power windows (P. 2-81) 2. Windshield (P. 8-22) 3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40) 4. Engine hood (P. 3-25)

LII2657
5. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)

6. Front fog lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-51) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) Front sonar sensors (if so equipped) (P. 5-122)
7. Headlight and turn signal switches (P. 2-43, 2-50) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-43) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-43)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-35) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-42)
9. Mirrors (P. 3-31) Side view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)
10. Door locks (P. 3-4) NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-9)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, King Cab® model similar.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

6. Truck box (P. 3-36) Tailgate (P. 3-36) Rearview camera (P. 4-10)
7. Towing (P. 10-33) 8. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-122) 9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) 10. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-25)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4) 11. Child safety rear door lock (if so equipped) (P. 3-4) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, King Cab® model similar.

1. Antenna (P. 4-43) 2. Cargo lamp (P. 2-52) 3. Rear sliding window (P. 2-81)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents

LII2416
4. Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) (P. 2-69)
5. Under rail bed lamps (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

6. Console box (if so equipped) (P. 2-69) Cup holders (P. 2-69)
7. Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Crew Cab model shown, King Cab® model similar.

1. Interior lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-88) 2. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-88)
Console light (if so equipped) (P. 2-88)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-30) 4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-31) 5. Glove box (P. 2-69)

LII2480
Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-28) 2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-50)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)

Horn (P. 2-52)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 0-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-22)

6. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)

(P. 5-49)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-51)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-18)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-62)

8. Audio controls*

9. Center display (P. 4-10)

10. Climate controls (P. 4-29)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-53)

12. Glove box (P. 2-69)

13. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)

14. Front passenger air bag status light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-53)

15. Power outlet (P. 2-64)

16. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

Heated front seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

LII2656 17. Heated steering wheel switch

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control*

(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System*

Warning systems switch (P. 2-57)

Vehicle information display controls

18. USB ports*

(P. 2-22)

19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

20. Parking Aids system switch (P. 2-61) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-57) 21. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-63) 22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-111) 23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-12) 24. Driver supplemental knee air bag light
(if so equipped) (P. 1-53) 25. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
control (P. 3-28) 26. Parking brake (P. 5-23) 27. Hood release (P. 3-25) 28. Headlight aiming control
(if so equipped) (P. 2-43) Power inverter switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-61) Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-52) Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-59) Hill descent control system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-58) 29. Headlight switch (P. 2-43)
Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-51) Instrument brightness control
switches (P. 2-43) Trip reset switch (P. 2-6) *Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual

Refer to the page number indicated in parenthesis for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine) (non-XD model) 1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15) 2. Fuse box (P. 8-24) 3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 7. Air cleaner (P. 8-21) 8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24) 9. Drive belt location (P. 8-19) 10. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 11. Battery (P. 8-16) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI3292

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine) (XD model) 1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15) 2. Fuse box (P. 8-24) 3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 7. Air cleaner (P. 8-21) 8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24) 9. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 10. Drive belt location (P. 8-19) 11. Battery (P. 8-16) 12. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LDI3293
Illustrated table of contents 0-9

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning/ Indicator light (red)

Name

Automatic Transmission Park

warning light

(

model)

Brake warning light
or

Page 2-13 2-14

Charge warning

2-14

light

Electric shift con- 2-15 trol system warning light

Engine oil pres-

2-15

sure warning light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning/ Indicator light (red)

Name

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Page 2-15

Master warning

2-16

light

Seat belt warning 2-16 light and chime
Security indicator 2-16 light

Supplemental air 2-16 bag warning light

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)
or

Name
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Page 2-17

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
Automatic Transmission check warning light
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

2-17
2-17 2-18

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name
Front passenger air bag status light (if so equipped)
Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light

Page 2-18 2-18 2-18

Malfunction Indi-

2-15

cator Light (MIL)

Master warning

2-16

light

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light

Slip indicator light

Page 2-21 2-21

Vehicle Dynamic

2-21

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

Warning/ Indicator
light (other)

Name
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) (green)

Page 2-21

Warning/ Indicator
light (other)

Name

High Beam Assist indicator light (green)

High beam indicator light (blue)

Page 2-21 2-21

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
TOW mode ON indicator light (green)
Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights (green)

2-22 2-22 2-22

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual bench seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Front manual captain's chair seat adjustment (if so equipped for passenger seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Front power captain's chair seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Front armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Rear armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head restraints/Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Removable (without Dual Head Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) System only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Top tether anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts -- rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts -- passenger seat and center seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Precautions on SRS (with NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Precautions on SRS (without NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . 1-78

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats and rear outboard seats) . . . . . . . . .1-81 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-82 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-82 Repair and replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . 1-83

SEATS

WARNING
· Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

ARS1152
· For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-16).
· After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
· Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
· The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2559
Forward and backward
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

LRS2560
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-16). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN'S CHAIR SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for passenger seat)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS2787
Front center bench seat adjustment
The front center bench seat folds down by pulling on the strap. It does not have adjustments in between the upright and the folded down positions. It is either in seating position or armrest position.

LRS2559
Forward and backward
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-16). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
LRS2560
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

FRONT POWER CAPTAIN'S CHAIR SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Operating tips
· The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
· Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
For additional information, see "Memory seat(s)" (P. 3-40).

LRS2743
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained.

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2744
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

LRS2270
Lumbar support (driver's seat)
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Push the switch as shown to adjust the seat lumbar area.

LRS0425
FRONT ARMRESTS (if so equipped)
To use the center armrest on the front bench seat, pull on the strap in between the front passenger and center seats and fold it down to the resting position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

LRS2748
REAR ARMRESTS (if so equipped)
To use the center armrest on the bench seats, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
· Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
· Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
· Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats.
Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.
Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.

· Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason.
· If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.
· When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
· Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2766
Folding the rear bench seat up
To fold the rear bench seat up for storage capacity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking tools from the storage area:
1. Lift the front of the seat cushion up.

LRS2767
2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward the back of the vehicle until it locks in place.

LRS2768
3. Repeat this process to raise and secure the seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle for maximum storage capacity.
To return the rear bench seat to a seating position, pull the latch on the bottom of the seat cushions to release the seat from the locked position. Make sure to properly push the seat cushion down into place.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

WARNING
· When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo, properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place.
· When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0920
Folding the rear bench seat down
The rear bench seat can be tilted forward to access the child restraint anchor point locations.
To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap
up O1 and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor points O2 can be accessed
behind the rear bench seatback.

WARNING
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/ headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks, except for Genuine Nissan Accessories specifically tested for use with the vehicle's head restraint/headrest stalks. Do not remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

LRS2020
Front bucket seat The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/ headrests.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
· Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

LRS2633
Front bench seat
· Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
· The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
· Proper Adjustment: For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
· If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

LRS2299
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

REMOVE

LRS2302

Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

LRS2302
REMOVABLE (without Dual Head Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) SYSTEM ONLY)
CAUTION Do not remove head restraint/headrest from vehicles equipped with Dual Head Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) System. Removal may damage the system wiring.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

INSTALL

LRS2303

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the
notch (notches) O1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob O2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

WRS0134
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2351
For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2305
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

SSS0136
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
· Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

SSS0134

SSS0016
WARNING
· The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SSS0014
WARNING
· Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
· Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

· Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
· Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
· Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
· Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
· If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

· Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
· All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver's and passenger's front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.
For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).

NOTE:
The rear seats are equipped with a seat belt warning message in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
· Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
· Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
· For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

· Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS2559
Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2).

1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front power captain's chair seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2743

LRS2674
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle
OA until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
· The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
· If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips OB as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack OC . Be
sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat, front center seat (if so equipped), and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: · Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) · Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-28).
The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-53).

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
· Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: · When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor · When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS3308
Center of rear seat
Selecting correct set of seat belts: The rear center seat belt buckle is identified
by the CENTER mark OA . The rear center
seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the rear center seat belt buckle.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-16). To adjust, pull out
the adjustment button O1 and move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-
tion O2 , so the belt passes over the center
of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING
· After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
· The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING
· Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.
· Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
· Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
· To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
· If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD SAFETY

· Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
· Rear-facing child restraints

· Forward-facing child restraints
· Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-28).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-28).
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat . Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-53).
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
· Are the child's back and hips against the vehicle seatback?
· Is the child able to sit without slouching?
· Do the child's knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
· Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
· Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

CHILD RESTRAINTS

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

WRS0256
Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.
NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see "Forward-

1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

facing child restraint installation using the seat belts -- passenger seat and center seat" (P. 1-45).
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items.
A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.
Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
· When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, see

"LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system" (P. 1-30).
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
· Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
· Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.
· If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
· If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

· If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
· Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

LRS2859
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LRS3036
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

LRS3148
LATCH lower anchor point locations

LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

LRS0393
TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINT LOCATIONS
Anchor points are located in the following locations:
· Behind the rear bench seat as shown.
· On the back of the passenger and center seats (King Cab® models if so equipped) as shown.

LRS2879
King Cab® models (if so equipped)

1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-25) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-28) before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the rear bench seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

LRS2997
Rear-facing webbing-mounted step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

LRS2996
Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

LRS0673
Rear-facing step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674
Rear-facing step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-25) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-28) before installing a child restraint.

1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0256
Rear-facing step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WRS0761
Rear-facing step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

LRS2395
Rear-facing step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2396
Rear-facing step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762
Rear-facing step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2397
Rear-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-25) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-28) before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the rear bench seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

straint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-11).
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS2995
Forward-facing webbing-mounted step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-40).

LRS2994
Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child re-

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.

LRS0671
Forward-facing step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0697
Forward-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-39

Rear bench seat
A Anchor points
Installing top tether strap

LRS2769

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear bench outboarding seating positions only).

Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-11) for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
2. Position the top tether strap over the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS -- REAR BENCH SEAT
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-25) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-28) before installing a child restraint.

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-11).
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0680
Forward-facing step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-40).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

LRS0667
Forward-facing step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668
Forward-facing step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0681
Forward-facing step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0698
Forward-facing step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

A Anchor points
Installing top tether strap

LRS2769

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-11).
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap as shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS -- PASSENGER SEAT AND CENTER SEAT (if so equipped)
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63).
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-25) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-28) before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0680
Forward-facing step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-48).
1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0668
Forward-facing step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8.

Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

WRS0475
Forward-facing -- step 10 10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light (if so equipped) may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63).
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3321
A Top tether straps
B Anchor points (if so equipped)
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.
Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.
A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/ shoulder belt.

LRS2479
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
· Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
· Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in "Child safety" (P. 1-25), "Child restraints" (P. 1-28) and "Booster seats" (P. 1-49) before installing a child restraint.

LRS0453
· Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.
· If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

LRS0464
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

LRS0454
Front passenger position

LRS0451
Rear center position

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

LRS0452
Rear outboard position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-11).

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Three-point type seat belt with retractor" (P. 1-19).

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch

in the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light

(if so equipped)

may or may not illuminate, depending on

the size of the child and the type of

booster seat being used. For additional

information, see "Front passenger air

bag and status light" (P. 1-63).

1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (with NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) (if so equipped)
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
· Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
· Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
· Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
· Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag
· Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats and rear outboard seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and right front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and right front passenger in certain side impact

collisions. The side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions (if so equipped) in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags
This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver's and front passenger's knees in certain collisions.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-16).

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

WARNING
· The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

WRS0031
· The front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63).

· The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.
· The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63).
· Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.
· The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

ARS1133

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

ARS1041
WARNING
· Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1042
WARNING
· Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

WRS0256
WARNING
· Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WRS0431
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
· The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

LRS0396
Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162
Do not lean against doors or windows.

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
· The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

LRS0421
WARNING
· When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
· Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

SSS0159

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) (if so equipped)

LRS3294
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Driver and passenger supplement knee air bags
7. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
8. Occupant classification system control unit
9. Seat belt buckle switches
10. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
12. Satellite sensor (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear outboard seats) (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items.
· Do not allow a passenger in the rear bench seats to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
· Do not place heavy loads heavier than 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.
· Do not store luggage behind the seat that can press into the seatback.
· Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear bench seats. If the front seat does contact the rear bench seats, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.

· If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat as occupied and the passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-28).
· Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
· If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor and the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based upon the information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity. Additionally, the front passenger

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

air bag and passenger knee air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63). One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags, other than the driver's knee air bag, do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0475
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air bag status light which is located on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:
· Unoccupied front passenger's seat: The light is OFF and the front passenger
air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

· Front passenger seat occupied by a

small adult, child or child restraint as out-

lined in this section: The

light may or

may not illuminate, depending on the size

of the occupant or the type of child re-

straint being used. When the

light is

illuminated, the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash. For

additional information, see "Front pas-

senger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63).

· Occupied front passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions as out-

lined in this section: The

light is OFF

to indicate that the front passenger air

bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

For additional information, see "Normal operation" (P. 1-65) and "Troubleshooting" (P. 1-65).

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag and passenger

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

knee air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF under some conditions. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child up to the approximate size and weight of a one year old is properly restrained in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF. For a properly restrained child who is larger than the approximate size and weight of a one year old, the front passenger air bag may or may not be automatically turned OFF, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. After installing the child restraint and positioning the child, place the ignition switch in the ON position: if the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated, the front passenger air bag and

passenger knee air bag are OFF. If the front passenger air bag status light is not illuminated, the air bag will inflate in a crash.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child

1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-28).
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are

OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. Always make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly.
If necessary, a NISSAN dealer can check system operation by using a special tool. Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light

, located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

· Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the "Seats" section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" section of this manual.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

NOTE:
This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system locks the classification during driving so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the occupant classification sensor system may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
· An object weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
· Occupant is a small adult -- the air bag light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
· Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

1-66 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
· Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
· Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
· Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
· Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

· Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
· A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (without NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) (if so equipped)
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
· Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag
· Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
· Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
· Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats and rear outboard seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and right front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and right front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-16).
The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-68 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0031
· The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.

· The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
· Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.
· The air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

ARS1133

1-70 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

ARS1045

WRS0256
WARNING
· Even with the air bag system, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

1-72 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0396
Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162
Do not lean against doors or windows.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

SSS0159

Supplemental air bag system
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags inflators

LRS3295
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Driver and passenger supplement knee air bags
7. Seat belt buckle switches
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
10. Satellite sensors (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
11. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear outboard seats) (passenger's side shown; driver's side similar)
This vehicle is equipped with supplemental front air bag system for the driver and right front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemental front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The supplemental air bag system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU) and seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and whether the seat belts are being used. Only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. This does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about the performance of your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the beginning of this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the driver and right front passenger. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags, other than the driver's knee air bag, do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the

1-76 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
· Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bag inflates.
· Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
· If your vehicle has front recovery hooks as original factory equipment do not remove or modify them. If it was not equipped with front recovery hooks do not install them. Either action could affect proper operation of the front air bag system resulting in injury or death.
· Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harness* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
· A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77

flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.

LRS2094
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may in-

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

1-78 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
· Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
· Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.

· Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

LRS2599
Driver's side
DRIVER AND PASSENGER SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG
The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver's and passenger's side. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79

LRS3244
Passenger's side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the power switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the power switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
· Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver's or passenger's seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.
· Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
· Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver or passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.

1-80 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s) (front seats and rear outboard seats)
WARNING
· The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
· If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
· If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front and rear outboard seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s') activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the
pretensioner system. For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning light" (P. 1-82). If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

WRS0885
1. SRS Air bag warning labels The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING

1-82

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
· The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
· The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
· The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
· Once a front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or knee air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
· The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-83

· If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (if so equipped) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS (weight sensor) (if so equipped) should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS (weight sensor) (if so equipped) function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.
1-84 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Auxiliary gauges (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Off-road and 4Wheel Drive (4WD) monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-55
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-56
Warning systems switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . 2-57

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-58
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Parking Aids system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 12v Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 120v outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Rear-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Console side pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-69 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Under-seat storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Console box storage trays (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Cell phone storage tray (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-72 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-74 Under front seat storage bin (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Overhead sunglasses storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-79 Cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 C-Channel cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-80
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Rear power window switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88 Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88 Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89 Personal Lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89

Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92

Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-93 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-28) 2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-50)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-40)
2-4 Instruments and controls

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)

Horn (P. 2-52)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 0-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-22)

6. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)

(P. 5-49)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-51)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-18)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-62)

8. Audio controls*

9. Center display (P. 4-10)

10. Climate controls (P. 4-29)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-53)

12. Glove box (P. 2-69)

13. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)

14. Front passenger air bag status light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-53)

15. Power outlet (P. 2-64)

16. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

Heated front seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)

LII2656 17. Heated steering wheel switch

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control*

(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System*

Warning systems switch (P. 2-57)

Vehicle information display controls

18. USB ports*

(P. 2-22)

19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in parenthesis for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-5

METERS AND GAUGES
1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display
Odometer Outside temperature display 4. Speedometer 5. Fuel gauge 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge
2-6 Instruments and controls

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located in the vehicle information display to the left of the speedometer and can be accessed with the vehicle in the ON position.
LIC4125

Changing the display
Push the TRIP RESET switch O2 on the left
side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows:

ODO Trip

Trip

ODO

Resetting the trip odometer
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch O2 for
about 2 seconds resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC2218
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

LIC2921
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
O1 are displayed in the vehicle information
display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-7

LIC3536
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
the engine into the red zone O1 .
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

LIC2220
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant tempera-
ture is within the normal range O1 when
the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-12) for immediate action required.

2-8 Instruments and controls

LIC2222
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door

is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
· If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-15).
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to "---" when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).
NOTE:
· The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.
· If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.
· Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

Instruments and controls 2-9

LIC4328
AUXILIARY GAUGES (if so equipped)
1. Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge
2. Voltmeter
3. Engine oil pressure gauge
4. Engine oil temperature gauge
Automatic Transmission fluid temperature gauge This gauge indicates the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid.

CAUTION
· This gauge is not designed to indicate low automatic transmission fluid level. Use the dipstick to check the fluid level. For additional information, see "9speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)" (P. 8-13).
· If the gauge indicates automatic transmission fluid temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. It is recommended that you have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the transmission.
Voltmeter
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the range is not within the normal range (11 15 volts) while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Engine oil pressure gauge
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. The bar should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running.
CAUTION
· This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).
· If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, it is recommended that you have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine.
Engine oil temperature gauge
This gauge measures the temperature of the engine oil.

2-10 Instruments and controls

The Tire Angle & 4WD Gauge (right) indicates the angle of the tires based on turning of the steering wheel and 4WD status. The graphic image will show the actual vehicle tire position while the angle is to be displayed above as reference. The 4WD status is displayed below.

LIC4329
OFF-ROAD AND 4WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) MONITOR (if so equipped)
The off-road and 4WD monitor displays the various conditions of the vehicle.
The Pitch and Roll Gauge (left) indicates the angle of the vehicle position left, right, up or down. The value will be displayed while the vehicle graphic will rotate to indicate vehicle condition: left, right, up or down.

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Warning/Indicator light (red)

Automatic Transmission Park warning

light (

model)

Brake warning light

Charge warning light

Electric shift control system warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Master warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

2-12 Instruments and controls

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

Automatic Transmission check warning light

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light (if so equipped)

Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Master warning light

Warning/Indicator light (other)
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) (green) High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
High beam indicator light (blue)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green) TOW mode ON indicator light (green)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)

Warning/Indicator light (red)

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)

Warning/Indicator light (other)

Supplemental air bag warning light

Rear Automatic Braking OFF warning light

Slip indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:

, ATP ,

If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

Automatic Transmission

Park warning light

(

model)

WARNING
· If the 4WD mode indicator is off or the ATP warning light is on, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, causing serious personal injury or property damage. Always set the parking brake. For additional information, see "Using 4wheel drive (4WD)" (P. 5-105).

Instruments and controls 2-13

· If the ATP light is on, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and the transfer case is in neutral.
· When parking, always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set. Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or property damage.
· Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warning light when the shift lever is in the P position and the ATP warning light is on. (Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position, move the shift lever to the N position once, shift the shift lever into P again and make sure the ATP warning light is off.)
This light indicates that the automatic transmission parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.
2-14 Instruments and controls

Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running, with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Brake fluid" (P. 8-14).

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
· Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
· Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort and pedal travel.
· If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
· Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system (if so equipped) and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For additional information, see "Variable voltage control system" (P. 8-19).
· Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Electric shift control system warning light
This light illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system. When the master warning light illuminates, the chime sounds and the following message is displayed in the vehicle information display: "When parked apply parking brake".
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the chime sounds continuously. Ensure the parking brake is applied

Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately, and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, see "Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test" (P. 10-59).

Instruments and controls 2-15

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

· MIL on steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the

light does not turn off

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

· MIL blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h). avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion. avoid steep uphill grades. if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

2-16 Instruments and controls

for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle information display warnings appear. · Parking brake release warning · Transmission system warning
Seat belt warning light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and remains illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger seat is occupied. The front passenger seat belt does not activate until 5 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-16).
Security indicator light
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational.
For additional information, see "Security systems" (P. 2-37).
Supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
· The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
· The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
· The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-53).
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yellow)
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information, see "Brake system" (P. 5-115).

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80).
Automatic Transmission check warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-17

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully engaged.
The indicator light flashes when the system is first turned on. When the system fully engages, the light remains on. If the switch is on and the indicator light continues to flash, the system is not engaged.
For additional information, see "Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch" (P. 2-59) and "Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system" (P. 5-112).
Front passenger air bag status light (if so equipped)
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-63).

Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on briefly and then turns off.
The light comes on when the hill descent control system is activated.
If the hill descent control switch is on and the indicator light blinks, the system may be disabled.
You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.
If the indicator light does not come on when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Hill descent control system ON indicator light" (P. 2-18) and "Hill descent control system" (P. 5-121).

Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning also appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,

2-18 Instruments and controls

the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "In case of emergency" (P. 6-3).
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "Tire pressure" (P. 8-35).

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening to

turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. · When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. · Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
Instruments and controls 2-19

CAUTION
· The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
· If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.
· Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, see "Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test" (P. 10-59).

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

· MIL on steady -- An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.

Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel

Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the

light does not turn off

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed

to the dealer.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle information display warnings appear. · No key warning · Low fuel warning · Low windshield-washer fluid warning · Loose fuel cap warning · Low tire pressure warning · 4WD error (if so equipped) · Front & rear tire size differences (if so
equipped)

2-20 Instruments and controls

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-75).
Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The

indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system is not operating.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-118).

The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the

indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (other)
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, see "Fog light switch" (P. 2-51).
High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see "Headlight switch" (P. 2-43).
High beam indicator light (blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
Instruments and controls 2-21

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is selected. For additional information, see "Headlight switch" (P. 2-43).
TOW mode ON indicator light (green)
This light comes on when the tow mode function is on.
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
2-22 Instruments and controls

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found. · The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors. · The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).

LIC3224
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: · Vehicle settings · Trip computer information · Drive system warnings and settings (if so
equipped) · Cruise control system information
· Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system
· Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system
· NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation information
· Indicators and warnings
· Tire Pressure information
· Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped)

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

LIC4099

The vehicle information display can be

navigated using the ENTER and

but-

tons located on the steering wheel.

1. ENTER -- press to select the vehicle infor-

mation menu items. Additionally, use the

UP/DOWN

function to navigate the

menu items

-- move LEFT/RIGHT to navigate

through the items in the vehicle infor-

mation display

The ENTER button also controls audio functions. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC (if so equipped) position, the vehicle information display may display the following screens: · Speed · Off Road · Auxiliary Gauges (if so equipped) · Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped) · Driving · Fuel Economy · Audio · Navigation (if so equipped) · Compass (if so equipped) · Driving Aids · Tire Pressures · Warning Confirmation · Settings
Warning Confirmation will only display if there are any warnings present. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-31).

To control which items display in the vehicle information display, see "Settings" (P. 2-23).
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display: · Driver Assistance · Meter Settings · Vehicle Settings · Towing Settings (if so equipped) · Alerts · Maintenance · Unit · Language · Factory Reset

Instruments and controls 2-23

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving and parking aids.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Lane

Menu item Warning (LDW)

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

Emergency Brake Front

Rear

Driver Attention

Traffic Sign Parking Aids
Moving Object

CTA

Sensor Display Volume Range

Explanation
Displays available lane options.
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-27).
Displays available blind spot options.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-32).
Displays available emergency brake options.
Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80) and "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-89).
Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-75).
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-101).
Allows use to turn the Speed Limit Sign recognition on or off. For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition" (P. 5-24).
Displays available parking aids.
Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, see "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P. 4-23).
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-41).
Allows the user to turn the sensors on, only the front sensors on, or turn the sensors off.
Allows user to turn the display on or off in the vehicle information display.
Allows user to adjust the volume of warning chimes.
Allows user to set a specific range for the sensors to engage.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Meter Settings
The meter settings allow the user to change the settings for the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Main Menu Selection
Speed Off Road
Auxiliary Gauges
Driving Speed Limit Sign Fuel Economy Audio
Navigation
Driving Aids Tire Pressures TPMS ECO Drive Report Display ECO Drive Report Welcome Effect Dial Effect Display Effect

Explanation Allows user to customize the screens shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speedometer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the off road and 4WD monitor on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Off-Road and 4WD Monitor" (P. 2-11). Allows user to turn the auxiliary gauges on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Auxiliary gauges" (P. 2-10). Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual. Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual. Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to set tire pressure targets. Allows user to access the ECO drive report. Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off. Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history. Allows user to customize the available welcome effects. Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off. Allows user to turn the display effect on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Rear Door Alert
Alert and Horn Alert Only Off Lighting Welcome Light Auto Room Lamp Light Sensitivity Light Off Delay Turn indicator 3 Flash Pass Locking I-Key Door Lock Selective Unlock
Answer Back. Horn Auto Unlock
Off IGN Off Shift P

Explanation Displays the available rear Door Alert options. When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds. When selected, only the alert is displayed. When selected, no alert or horn will be active. Displays available lighting features of the vehicle. Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp feature on or off. Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Displays available turn indicator options. Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off. Displays available locking options. Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver's or front passenger's side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. Displays available options for the auto door unlock. Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

2-26 Instruments and controls

Wipers Rain Sensor Speed Dependent Headlamp On Off Wiper Low & High Wiper INT, Low & High
Memory Seat (ADP) Exit Seat Slide
Exit Steering Up
Reverse Tilt Mirror

Displays available wiper options.
Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. For additional information, see "Wiper and washer switch" (P. 2-40).
Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. For additional information, see "Wiper and washer switch" (P. 2-40).
Displays available headlamp on options.
Headlights do not activate automatically when the wipers are activated.
Headlights activate when the wiper stalk is set to either low or high mode.
Headlights activate when the wiper stalk is set to intermittent, low, or high mode.
Displays available memory seat options.
Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver's seat backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver's door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver's seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, see "Memory Seat" (P. 3-40).
Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steering wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver's door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information, see "Memory Seat" (P. 3-40).
Displays reverse tilt mirror information.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Towing Settings (if so equipped)
The towing settings menu allows the user to access the trailer light check.

Menu item Trailer light check

Explanation
Allows user to select a mode in which the vehicle will test various lights that could affect a trailer if connected properly. This feature can also be activated using the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2) and "Towing a trailer" (P. 10-33).

Alerts
The alarm menu allows the user to set specific alarms for various items on the vehicle.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Timer Alert Navigation Phone Mail

Menu item

Explanation Allows user to set the timer alert alarm. Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off. Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off. Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see "Changing wheels and tires" (P. 8-43). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Maintenance

Menu item

Oil and Filter Air Filter Tire Brake Pad Brake Fluid Battery Transmission Fluid Engine Coolant Spark Plug Other

Explanation Allows user to cycle through various maintenance items and set reminders to perform maintenance at specific intervals. Allows user to set an oil and filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set an air filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a tire reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a brake pad reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a brake fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a battery reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a transmission fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set an engine coolant reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a spark plug reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder, other than for the maintenance items listed above, at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Unit
The unit menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Mileage Pressure Temperature

Menu item

Displays available mileage display units. Displays available pressure display units. Displays available temperature display units.

Explanation

Language
The language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.

Language

Menu item

Explanation Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Factory Reset

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or deny the reset.

2-30 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in your vehicle information display.
Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-27).
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).
Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this warning appears for a period of time and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).
Battery Voltage Low Charge battery
This warning appears when the battery is low and needs to be charged.
Brightness indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle information display screen brightness is being adjusted.

Door Open
This warning appears when a door has been opened.
Flat Tire
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and one or more flat tires are detected while driving.
FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner's Manual
This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35).
Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the LED headlights are not functioning properly.
If this warning appears, have your system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, see "Fuel-filler door" (P. 3-25).
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Tire Pressure Error -- Info
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. Press the ENTER button for information about the low tire pressure. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).

Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Windshield-washer fluid" (P. 8-15).
Maintenance indicators
When engine oil service is due, one or more of these icons will appear automatically to remind you. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).
These will also appear when the user-set reminders are met. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
Power turned off to save the battery
This warning appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off to save the battery.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).

Push brake and start button to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Push Ignition to OFF
After the Push ignition to OFF warning appears, the warning will appear if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.
Range XX miles
This warning appears to indicate the approximate distance remaining before the fuel reaches 0 (Empty).

2-32 Instruments and controls

Check Rear Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-23).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-63).
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time.

· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-23).
For additional information, "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-63).

Rear seat belt reminder
This rear seat belt reminder appears after starting the engine.
If any of the rear passenger seat belts are not fastened, the seat belt icon illuminates in red to show which seat belt is not fastened. When a rear passenger's seat belt has been securely fastened, the color of the corresponding seat belt icon will change. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 35 seconds.
A chime will sound one time and the rear seat belt warning will appear if a rear passenger's seat belt is unfastened. The chime will not sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 mph (15km/h). The seat belt icon illuminates in red until the corresponding rear passenger's seat belt is fastened. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 35 seconds.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. Press the brake pedal to release the parking brake.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight switch" (P. 2-43).
Remote Engine Start Mode
This warning appears in the vehicle information display when the vehicle has been started using the remote start function. To start the vehicle, apply the brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position.
Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see "Extended storage switch" (P. 2-68).
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When parked apply parking brake
This message appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
4WD Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the 4-wheel drive system is not functioning properly while the engine is running.
4WD shift indicators
These indicators show which 4WD mode is selected. For additional information, see "Using 4wheel drive (4WD)" (P. 5-105).
4WD MODE SHIFTING
This message appears when the vehicle is shifting into 4WD. For additional information, see "Using 4wheel drive (4WD)" (P. 5-105).

2-34 Instruments and controls

AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK
If the service warning appears while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that the AT is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary, repaired promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: See Owner's Manual
If this message appears while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate that the AT is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the system checked, and if necessary, repaired promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Service AT
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80).

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW and RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-32) and "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-41).
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
For additional information, see "Cruise control" (P. 5-49).
Currently unavailable
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically cancelled: · When the VDC operates. · When a wheel slips. · When the VDC system is turned off.
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slips, and VDC system is off).

Instruments and controls 2-35

Driver Attention Alert -- Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-101).
Driver Attention Alert -- Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual
This message appears when one of the following systems (if so equipped) become unavailable because the front radar is obstructed:
· Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
· Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
· Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80), "Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol (ICC)" (P. 5-51) and "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-89).
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators
These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, see "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P. 5-51).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-27).
Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly: · Blind Spot Warning (BSW) · Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) · Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) · Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Not Available High Camera Temp
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104°F (40°C).
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-27) and "Traffic Sign Recognition" (P. 5-24).
Parking Sensor
This indicator appears when the sensor is activated. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-122).
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-122).

2-36 Instruments and controls

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-75).
Speed Limit Sign indicator
This message may appear when the Traffic Sign Recognition system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition" (P. 5-24).
System fault See Owner's Manual
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in one of the following systems: · Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection · Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW) · Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80), "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-89) and "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-75).

Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-32) and "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-41).
Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator appears when the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is engaged and has detected a vehicle.
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-80).

LIC0359
Your vehicle has two types of security systems: · Vehicle security system · NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or hood when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-37

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key or door handle request switch.

4. Confirm that the

security indicator

light stays on for about 30 seconds. The

vehicle security system is now pre-

armed. The vehicle security system will

automatically shift into the armed

phase. The

security light begins to

flash once every three seconds. If during

the pre-armed phase one of the follow-

ing occurs, the system will not arm:

· Any door is unlocked with the Intelligent Key or door request switch.

· Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON position.

· Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

· The lockable bedside storage compartment (if so equipped) is not protected by the vehicle security system.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
· The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently but synchronously.

· The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.
The alarm is activated by:
· opening any door or hood without using the Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock knob).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2-38 Instruments and controls

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LIC0474
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-39

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Type A (if so equipped)
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING

LIC3445

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

LIC3035
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
· Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

2-40 Instruments and controls

· Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshieldwasher fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
· Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshieldwasher fluid concentrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Rotate the end of the lever to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 Intermittent (INT) -- intermittent opera-
tion can be adjusted by turning the
knob toward OA (Slower) or OB (Faster).
Also, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
2 Low (LO) -- continuous low speed
operation
3 High (HI) -- continuous high speed
operation
Rotate the lever the opposite direction O4
to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Press the button on the end of the lever O5
to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

LIC3446
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or may damage a wiper.

Instruments and controls 2-41

· The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.
· When the windshield glass is coated with water repellent, the speed of the rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small.
· Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper system when you use a car wash.
· The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining.
· Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is recommended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For additional information, see "Windshield wiper blades" (P. 8-22).

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,
rotate the lever to the AUTO position O1 .
The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front
OB (High) or toward the rear OA (Low).
High -- High sensitive operation Low -- Low sensitive operation
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or rotate the lever to the LO or HI position.
NOTE:
The rain sensor feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped)
LIC2325
Type A (if so equipped)

2-42 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

NOTE:
If the rear power window (if so equipped) is open while the defroster switch is on, the rear window defroster will automatically shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if so equipped) will remain on. The rear window defroster will automatically turn on when the rear power window is fully closed if the switch is on.

LIC3542
Type B (if so equipped)
To defrost the rear window glass and/or outside mirrors, start the engine and push the rear window/outside mirror defroster switch on. The indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

LIC3379
Type A (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

2 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the headlights will come on. All

other lights, except the map lights (if so

equipped), will remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Type B (if so equipped) CAUTION

LIC4323

Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

2-44 Instruments and controls

LIC4331
Type C (if so equipped)

LIC3380
Type A (if so equipped)
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: · Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. · Turn off all the lights when it is light. · Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC4324

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-23).

To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position O1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

LIC4332

Type C (if so equipped)

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF,

, or

position.

The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously).
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes.

LIC3487
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor O1 located on the top
side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged.
Instruments and controls 2-45

Follow me home lighting (if so equipped)
The follow me home feature allows you to provide lighting from the vehicle after the ignition switch has been placed in the OFF position. Pulling the headlight stalk toward you once will activate the headlights for approximately 30 seconds. After that period of time, it will automatically switch off. It is possible to pull the headlight stalk up to four times to increase the lighting period up to 2 minutes.
NOTE:
The follow me home feature can be canceled by placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

LIC3060

Headlight beam select

1 To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are on using the

headlight control switch, then push the

lever forward. The high beam lights

come on and the blue

indicator

light illuminates.

2 Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off. The low beams need not be engaged for this function.

High Beam Assist
The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.
WARNING
· The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.
· The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).
When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

2-46 Instruments and controls

When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
When driving on a road with many curves.
When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.
When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.

· The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.
The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

LIC4324
High Beam Assist operation
To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-
sition O1 and then push the wiper and washer switch forward O2 (high beam po-
sition). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-47

LIC4333

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the

posi-

tion or select the low beam position by

placing the lever in the neutral position.

2-48 Instruments and controls

LSD2712
Ambient image sensor maintenance
The ambient image sensor O1 for the High
Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in the

position, the headlights will

turn off after a period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off

with the headlight switch in the

position, the headlights will illuminate

again if the headlight switch is moved to

the OFF position and then turned to the

position.

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC2230
Manual headlight aiming control (if so equipped)
Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be lowered with the operation of the switch.
The larger the number designated on the switch, the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat road, select position 0.
Select the switch position by referring to the following sample.

Vehicle Load
Driver only or Driver/front passenger
Driver/front seat passenger/rear seat pas-
sengers
Driver/front seat passenger/rear seat passengers/cargo or driver/cargo/no trailer
Fully loaded/no trailer

Switch Position
0 1
2 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
The lights in the fog light area automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) operate with the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate when the parking brake

is released. The DRL remain on while the engine is running.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminates at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED Daytime Running Lights (LED DRL) operate with the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. When you turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination, the LED lights switch from LED DRL to the park function.
Instruments and controls 2-49

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL remain on while the engine is running.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch ON for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC3176
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Press the "+" button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.
Press the "-" button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.

LIC3061
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1 Move the lever up or down to signal
the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
2 Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

2-50 Instruments and controls

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass turn indicator may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes fog. This is not a malfunction, if large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

LIC4325

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the

position, then push the

fog light switch O1 on.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then push the fog light switch on.

To turn the fog lights off, push the fog light switch again.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

Instruments and controls 2-51

HORN

CARGO LAMP SWITCH (if so equipped)

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the climate controlled seats if you or the occupants cannot monitor seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat. Use of the climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury.

LIC2051
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

LIC0616
To turn on the cargo lamp and the under rail bed lamps (if so equipped) push the switch down to the ON position. The tailgate lights (if so equipped) will also illuminate when the cargo lamp switch is in the ON position.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

CAUTION
· The battery could run down if the climate control seat is operated while the engine is not running.
· Do not use the climate control seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
· Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
· Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar objects. This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.

2-52 Instruments and controls

· Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
· The climate controlled seat has an air filter. Do not operate the climate controlled seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.
· When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
· If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SIC4334
The climate controlled seat warms up or cools down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air from under the surface of the seat. The climate control switch is located on the center console.
The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows:
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the control knob OA to the heat side O1 or the cool side O2 . The indicator light OB on the control knob will illuminate.

3. Adjust the desired amount of air using the control knob. The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approximately 60 seconds after turning the switch on or selecting the desired temperature.
4. When the vehicle's interior is warmed or cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the control knob to the Off (center) position. The indicator light
OB on the control knob goes off with the
switch in the off (center) position.
To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-53

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
· Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
· Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
· Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
· Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

· When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
· If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
LIC3037
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

2-54 Instruments and controls

HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

CAUTION
· The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
· Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
· Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
· Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
· Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

LIC3037
The rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the rear of the front center console and can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
Instruments and controls 2-55

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off. The switch will turn off automatically 30 minutes after activation, once this happens the switch will need to be pressed again to restart the cycle.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC4582
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

2-56 Instruments and controls

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH

LIC2225
The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the following systems that are activated using the Settings menu in the vehicle information display:
· Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
When the warning systems switch is
turned off, the indicator O1 on the switch is
off. The indicator will also be off if all of the warning systems are deactivated using the settings menu.

The BSW system will turn on the side indicator lights, located by the outside mirrors, if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the side indicator light will flash.
The LDW system will sound a warning; the steering wheel will vibrate; and the LDW indicator (orange) will blink to alert the driver of the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers.
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-32) and "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-27).

LIC3344

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator will come

on.

Instruments and controls 2-57

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if so equipped)
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-118).

· The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

2-58 Instruments and controls

LIC3447
WARNING
· Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

CAUTION
When the hill descent control system operates continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake pads may increase and the hill descent control system may be temporarily disabled (the indicator light will blink). If the indicator light does not come on continuously after blinking, stop using the system.
The hill descent control system is designed to reduce driver workload when going down steep hills. The hill descent control system helps to control vehicle speed so the driver can concentrate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:
· activate the 4H or 4LO switch,
· the transmission shift lever must be in forward or reverse gear,
· the hill descent control system switch must be ON.
The vehicle speed must be kept below 15 mph (25 km/h).
The hill descent control indicator light will come on when the system is activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent control system applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.
You may hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates the hill descent control system is working properly.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator light blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for system activation are not met or if the system becomes disengaged for any reason.
To turn off the hill descent control system, push the switch to the OFF position.
For additional information, see "Hill descent control system ON indicator light" (P. 2-18) and "Hill descent control system" (P. 5-121).

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM SWITCH (if so equipped)
LIC4341
The E-Lock system can help provide added traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck. To activate the E-Lock system: · the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO posi-
tion (4-wheel drive vehicles), · the vehicle must be stopped or moving at
4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and · the E-Lock system switch must be
turned ON.

Instruments and controls 2-59

When the E-Lock system switch is turned ON, the indicator light will flash until the system engages. However, if all operation conditions listed above are not met or the system becomes disengaged, the indicator light will continue to flash.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock system is on.
For additional information, see "Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system" (P. 5-112) for further explanation and system limitations.
WARNING
· Never leave the E-Lock system ON when driving on paved or hardsurfaced roads. Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury. After using the E-Lock system to free the vehicle, turn the system OFF.

· Use the E-lock system only in an emergency when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even using 4LO. Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice surface. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
· Observe the above warnings. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control may result. This may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
CAUTION
· After using the E-Lock system, or during normal driving, turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to drivetrain components from extended use.
· When the E-Lock system is in operation, turning the vehicle becomes difficult. This can be dangerous, especially at high speeds. Doing so could damage drivetrain components.

· Do not operate the E-Lock system when the vehicle is turning or when one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise, the drivetrain components could be damaged.
· The E-Lock system operates only when the engine is running.
· In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does not operate when the E-Lock system switch is turned to the ON position. (The E-Lock system indicator light will flash.)
· Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock system is in operation. Otherwise the drivetrain components could be damaged.
· Observe the above cautions. Otherwise, loss of normal steering may result.

2-60 Instruments and controls

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so equipped)

PARKING AIDS SYSTEM SWITCH
CAUTION
· Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
· Do not attempt to use this while driving.
· Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory, doing so could significantly drain the battery of your vehicle.

LIC2075
To use the outlets for devices that require up to 120v power, the vehicle must be running and the power inverter switch must be on.
When the vehicle is in the P (Park) position, the 400W and the 150W will automatically illuminate. When the vehicle is out of the P (Park) position, only 150W will illuminate.
For additional information, see "120v outlets" (P. 2-66) regarding using devices that require the power inverter switch to be activated.

LIC3596
The Parking Aids system switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the following systems (if so equipped) on and off. To turn the systems on and off, the ignition switch must be in the ON position. · Front and rear sonar system · Moving Object Detection (MOD) · Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) · Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
The indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the systems are turned on.

Instruments and controls 2-61

TOW MODE SWITCH

If the indicator light flashes when the Front and rear sonar system, MOD, RAB, or RCTA systems are not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in one or more of these systems (if so equipped).
The Front and rear sonar system, MOD, RAB, or RCTA systems will be turned on automatically under the following conditions:
· When the ignition switch is switched from the OFF position to the ON position.
· When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position.
The automatic turning on function can be turned on and off for these systems in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 2-23).
For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-122), "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-75), "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-41), or "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P. 4-23).

LIC3381
Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
Push the tow mode switch to activate tow mode. The TOW indicator light illuminates when tow mode is selected. Push the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode off.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
For additional information, see "Tow mode" (P. 10-54).

2-62 Instruments and controls

E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)

TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT (TBCU) (if so equipped)

REAR DOOR ALERT

LIC3376
The E-call (SOS) system button is used in combination with a NissanConnect® Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an emergency.
Pushing the button will (with a paid subscription) reach a Response Specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle's occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/ connect or call 8554266628.

LIC3382
The TBCU on the instrument panel allows the driver to adjust the braking force applied to the trailer brakes.
For additional information, see "Towing a trailer" (P. 10-33).

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-31).
When the system is enabled:
· The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver' door is closed and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-33).
· If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate.

Instruments and controls 2-63

POWER OUTLETS

When the Rear Door Alert system is activated and a driver exits the vehicle after arriving at a destination:
· When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a message appears in the vehicle information display for a driver to "Dismiss Message" or "Disable Alert" if desired.
· With the system enabled, when the driver exits the vehicle, an audible alert (horn sound) will occur unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert.
· If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound.
· If the audible horn alert occurs, a message will also appear in the vehicle information display that states, "Check Rear Seat for All Articles".

WARNING
· If the driver selects "Disable Alert", no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status.
· There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
· The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-33).

Instrument panel
12V OUTLETS

LIC4326

2-64 Instruments and controls

LIC3385
Inside center console (if so equipped)

LIC3784
Rear center console (if so equipped)
The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.
The power outlets located on the instrument panel, inside the center armrest (if so equipped), and on the back of the center console (if so equipped) are powered only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION
· The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
· Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
· Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
· Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
· Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
· Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights, or rear window defroster (if so equipped) is on.
· Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.
· Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
· When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-65

LIC0617
In truck box (if so equipped)
120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)

LIC4322
Center console (if so equipped)

2-66 Instruments and controls

120V OUTLET What is plugged in
No Device but Switch On
Device<150W 150W<Device<400W
Device>400W

Shifter In Park

Indicator

Inverter Status

150W and 400W

OFF

Shifter Out of Park
Indicator Inverter Status

150W

OFF

Shifter Back In Park

Indicator

Inverter Status

150W and 400W

OFF

Switch Reset

Shifter In Park

Indicator

Inverter Status

Shifter Out of Park
Indicator Inverter Status

150W and 400W

150W

150W and 400W 150W and 400W
OFF**

ON ON OFF**

150W OFF** OFF**

ON OFF** OFF**

** OFF means the inverter system cannot be reset until a device is within the specification range of operation. If the device is greater than specified, the inverter will shut OFF. The operating voltage is between 11.5v and 15v. If the vehicle is not idling, the battery voltage will drop which will cause the inverter to shut down when below 11.5v. When the vehicle is in the (P) Park position, it will work at 400W. If the vehicle is in any other shifter position, it will turn off.

Do not use the outlet located in the truck box with accessories that exceed 120 volt. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. When the dual wall bed liner is installed (if so equipped), the power outlet is still accessible through the access door in the bed liner.
CAUTION
· Operation of the 120 volt system with the ignition in the ON position and the engine not running (idle) will drain the battery charge. This could lead to a dead battery or no start condition.
· The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.

· Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
· Do not use double adaptors or more than one electrical accessory.
· Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
· Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.
· Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

· When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-67

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

LIC3502
The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel inside the glove box. To reach it, open
the glove box O1 on the instrument panel, then open the fuse panel cover O2 .
If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is ON by pushing it fully in place, as shown.

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268

2-68 Instruments and controls

STORAGE

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

LIC3397
REAR-DOOR POCKETS

LIC3213

LIC2392
CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-69

LIC0575
SEATBACK POCKETS
The seatback pocket(s) may be located on the back of the driver's and/or passenger's seat, there may be one or two pockets equipped. The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the driver's and/or front passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:
· Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.
· Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

LIC3407
Rear seat (driver's side shown)
UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if so equipped)
To access the storage bin, lift the bench seat toward the rear of the vehicle, then lift the cover the same direction. The cover
may be locked O1 (if so equipped).
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the tray under the seat, cargo in the trays should not exceed 20 lbs. (9.08kg).

2-70 Instruments and controls

LIC4583

To adjust the divider O3 , pull it straight up
and reposition it to the desired location, sliding it straight down.
Both sides of the storage bin, under the rear seat on the driver's and passenger's sides, operate similarly. They can be accessed simultaneously or independently of each other.
Further, to create a flat floor space for storage, rather than access the storage bin, lift the bench seat as before, then lift the tab
O2 and rotate the bin cover toward the
front of the vehicle. Use the tab as a leg to support the cover as the new floor space.
Cargo can be secured to the extended floor with bungee cords. Secure the bungee cords to the loops in the extended floor.

CAUTION
· To avoid damaging the extended floor, the weight secured should not exceed 247 lbs. (112 kg).
· To avoid damaging the bungee hook loops, do not exceed 35 lbs. (16 kg) of force to any given loop.
CAUTION
· To avoid damaging the extended floor, the leg of the extended floor must be perpendicular to the floor before any weight is applied.
· To avoid damaging the extended floor, ensure that the under-seat storage area is completely stowed before lowering the rear seat bottom.

LIC4098

Instruments and controls 2-71

LIC3406
CONSOLE BOX STORAGE TRAYS (if so equipped)

LIC4316
CELL PHONE STORAGE TRAY (if so equipped)
A removable storage tray. located in the center console, can be used to store up to two cell phones.

LIC3386
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box lock. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the glove box lock.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-72 Instruments and controls

LIC3399
CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)
WARNING
The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

LIC3400
Instruments and controls 2-73

CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if so equipped)
To access the center armrest storage area, lower the center armrest and lift the lid.
CAUTION The center armrest storage should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
2-74 Instruments and controls

LIC0621

Bench seat (center)
UNDER FRONT SEAT STORAGE BIN (if so equipped)
To access the storage bin, lift the center of the front bench seat toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION
· To avoid damaging the tray under the seat, cargo in the tray should not exceed 20 lbs. (9.08 kg).
· The cushion storage bin should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

LIC3437

LIC3387
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES STORAGE (if so equipped)
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver's view and to help prevent an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-75

CAUTION
· Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
· Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

2-76 Instruments and controls

LIC3401
Front -- Type A (if so equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
· Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
· Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

LIC3512
Front -- Type B (if so equipped)

LIC0622
Armrest (if so equipped)

LIC3402
2nd row (rear of front console) (if so equipped)

LIC3724
2nd row (door armrest) (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-77

LIC0556
2nd row bench (if so equipped)
2-78 Instruments and controls

Front bottle holder

LIC3396

Rear bottle holder

LIC3707

CAUTION
· Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
· Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

LIC3389
GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)
The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side. To access the grocery hooks, fold up the rear bench seat. For additional information, see "Folding the rear bench seat up" (P. 1-9).
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 18 lbs. (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

LIC3449
BED LINER STORAGE BINS (if so equipped)
To open the bed liner storage bins on the top of the wheel wells, unlock the bin and lift the lid toward the inside of the truck bed.
To close, replace the lid and lock the bin.

LIC3450
To open the bed liner storage bins on the tail gate end of the bed liner, lift the tab away from the truck bed, pull the lid up and away from the truck.

Instruments and controls 2-79

LIC3709
CARGO HOOKS (if so equipped)
When securing items using cargo hooks, located on the rear door pillars, do not apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
The cargo hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
The cargo hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.
· Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

LIC3710
C-CHANNEL CARGO HOOKS (if so equipped)
The C-Channel cargo hooks, located on the back panel, can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
When securing items using C-Channel cargo hooks, located on the back panel, do not apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

2-80 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
· Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

Instruments and controls 2-81

To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

WIC1124
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side automatic window switch
4. Right rear passenger window switch (if so equipped)
5. Left rear passenger window switch (if so equipped)
6. Driver side automatic window switch
Driver's side power window switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear (if so equipped) passenger windows.
2-82 Instruments and controls

WIC1125
Front passenger's power window switch
The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window, push the switch
and hold it down O1 . To close the window, pull the switch up O2 .

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WIC0261
Rear power window switch (if so equipped)
The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold
it down O1 . To close the window, pull the switch up O2 .
Locking passengers' windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC0410
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

Instruments and controls 2-83

LIC3448
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH (if so equipped)
WARNING
· You must ensure all occupants and objects are free of the rear window area prior to and during operation. Failure to do so may result in injury and/or damage to the rear window system.
· The rear window is not designed to carry long items through it.

· Do not place objects through the opened rear window. Do not use the rear window as a cargo area passthrough. This may result in damage to the rear window system, or personal injury.
WARNING
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
To open the rear power window, push in and hold the switch.
To close the rear power window, pull out and hold the switch.
To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

NOTE:
If the rear power window is opened while the defroster switch is on, the rear window defroster (if so equipped) will automatically shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if so equipped) will remain on. The rear window defroster will automatically turn on when the rear power window is fully closed if the switch is on.

2-84 Instruments and controls

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
· Do not place objects through the opened rear window. Do not use the rear window as a cargo area passthrough. This may result in damage to the rear window system, or personal injury.
Squeeze the handles of the lever O1 , then slide the window open O2 .

LIC3488
REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so equipped)
WARNING
· You must ensure all occupants and objects are free of the rear window area prior to and during operation. Failure to do so may result in injury and/or damage to the rear window system.
· The rear window is not designed to carry long items through it.

LIC4327
POWER MOONROOF
The front moonroof is a power moonroof, the rear moonroof is fixed glass. The power moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
Instruments and controls 2-85

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push
the switch toward the open O1 or close O2
position and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push the switch once while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then
push the switch O3 and release it; it need
not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down position
O2 .
Resetting the moonroof switch
If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof
switch to the close position O2 .
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch to
the close position O2 for approximately
15 seconds.
3. Release the switch after the moonroof moves up, down, then back to the full tilt up position.
2-86 Instruments and controls

4. Push and hold the switch to the close
position O2 .
5. Release the switch after the moonroof completes one full cycle from the tilt up position to the closed position, then to the open position, and again to the fully closed position.
6. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof and sunshade are closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof and sunshade as it moves to the front, the moonroof and sunshade will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.

WARNING
· In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
· Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

To close the sunshade: · To fully close the sunshade, push the
switch toward the close position O2 .
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
· Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening.
· Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.

LIC4346
Sunshade
To open the sunshade: · To fully open the sunshade, push the
switch toward the open position O1 .
· To fully open the sunshade and the moonroof together, push the moonroof switch toward the open position.

Instruments and controls 2-87

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LIC0792
The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position O1 ,
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. When the switch is in the DOOR or normal
operation position O2 , the interior lights,
puddle lights (if so equipped), and cargo light will stay on for a period of time when:
2-88 Instruments and controls

· The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
· The driver's door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
· The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is activated when: · The driver's door is locked by the key fob,
a key, or the power door lock switch. · The ignition switch is turned ON.
When the switch is in the OFF position O3 ,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position. The puddle lights (if so equipped) and cargo light come on when any front or rear passenger door is opened.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC3405
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

LIC0790
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC3907
PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
· Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
· Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, see "Programming HomeLink®" (P. 2-90).

Instruments and controls 2-89

WARNING
· Your vehicle's engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. For additional information, see "Pushbutton ignition switch" (P. 5-12). Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
· Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

· During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc., that you are programming.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position (without starting the engine) when programming HomeLink®. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

LIC2365
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 13 in (28 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light O1 in view.

2-90 Instruments and controls

LIC4095
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indica-
tor light O1 flashes slowly and then rap-
idly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in "Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers" (P. 2-92).
3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
· If the indicator light O1 is solid/
continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
· If the indicator light O1 blinks rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a solid/ continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener's manual.
5. Press and release the "learn" or "smart" button.
NOTE: Once the button is pressed, you have approximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to three times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Instruments and controls 2-91

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "timeout" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Training" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink®" step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.
1. For additional information, see "Programming HomeLink®" step 1 (P. 2-90).
2-92 Instruments and controls

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" step 3 (P. 2-90) to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:
· Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
· Position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface.
· Press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.
· Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, see "Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button" (P. 2-93).
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1 (P. 2-90).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1 (P. 2-90).
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 18003553515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-93

MEMO
2-94 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-8 Child safety rear door lock (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-22 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Gasoline fuel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Automatic operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-29
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Card holder (driver's side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Memory Seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Linking a key fob to a stored memory position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

KEYS

LPD3106
Type A (if so equipped) 1. Intelligent Key (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Master key
4. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle's Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

LPD3605
Type B (if so equipped)
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to the use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
· Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
· Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
· Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
· Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
· Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA1951
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door, tailgate and glove box.

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, see "Doors" (P. 3-4), "Tailgate" (P. 3-36) or "Storage" (P. 2-69).
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself, keep the mechanical key and master key with you to protect your belongings.
To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box and tailgate with the mechanical key or master key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key without the mechanical key to the valet, keep the mechanical and master key with you.
For additional information, see "Storage" (P. 2-69) and "Tailgate" (P. 3-36).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
· Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
· Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

For additional information, see "Security systems" (P. 2-37).

Driver's side
LOCKING WITH KEY

WPD0311

To lock the door using the mechanical key,

turn the key toward the front of the vehicle
O1 . This will only lock the door and will not

activate the security system. To arm the

security system, press the

button

on the Intelligent Key.

To unlock the door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle O2 . This will only unlock the corre-
sponding door and will not disarm the security system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Lockout protection
With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle, if all doors are locked, then closed, a chime will sound after the last door is closed and all doors will unlock automatically.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

LPD2092
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock to the lock position O1 , then
close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position
O2 .

WPD0381
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors and the tailgate lock (if so equipped) without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's
side) to the lock position O1 . When locking
the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors and the tailgate lock (if so equipped) without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passen-
ger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0278
REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)
1. Open the driver's or passenger's door.

LPD2591
2. From the outside, pull the door handle
OA toward you.

LPD2592
3. Open the door to the desired position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

LPD2593

LPD2594
CAUTION
Be careful when opening and exiting the driver's side rear door if the fuelfiller door is open. This may cause damage to the driver's side rear door or fuel-filler door if you open fully and they make contact.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so equipped)
· All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
· All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, depending on the option selected in the "Vehicle Settings" menu.
NOTE: The Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped) feature can be changed using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM

LPD3096
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK (if so equipped)
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position O1 ,
the door can be opened from the outside or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position O2 ,
the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
· Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving and transmitting radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves from various distances. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:
· When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
· When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a CB radio.
· When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
· When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
· When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.
· When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indicator light illuminates with the message "Warning, Key ID Incorrect" in the vehicle information display. When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so equipped) will blink. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-31).
Since the Intelligent Key is capable of receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-27).

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request
switch O1 (if so equipped).
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80
cm) from each request switch O1 (if so
equipped).

LPD2338
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass or handle, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
· Do not push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
· After locking with the door handle request switch (if so equipped), verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

· To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.
· Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD3097
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.

Locking doors

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD3098

LPD3099
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close the driver's door and push the driver's door request switch (if so equipped) OR close all doors and push any door request switch (if so equipped) while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
3. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the tailgate lock (if so equipped) will lock.
5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice, the outside chirp sounds twice, and the front and tail lights may turn on for 10 seconds.
NOTE:
· Request switches (if so equipped) for all doors can be deactivated when the "I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)" setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
· Doors and the tailgate lock (if so equipped) will lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped)
O1 while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
· Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) while the driver's door is open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.

· Doors and the tailgate lock (if so equipped) do not lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. A beep will sound to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.
CAUTION
· When locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

· The request switch (if so equipped) is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
When any door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; a chime will sound and the lock will automatically unlock.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

LPD3098

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped).

3. The door will unlock and the hazard indicator lights flash once, the outside chirp sounds once, and the front and tail lights may turn on for 30 seconds.

4. Push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) again within one minute.

5. The outside chirp will sound once and the remaining doors and tailgate lock (if so equipped) will unlock.

LPD3099
NOTE:
· If "Selective Unlock" is turned OFF in the Vehicle Settings, all doors and tailgate lock (if so equipped) will unlock upon the first request switch (if so
equipped) O1 press.
· The request switch (if so equipped) can be deactivated when the "I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)" is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request (if so equipped) switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within one minute after pushing the request switch (if so equipped).
· Opening any door.
· Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
· Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
· Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
· Switching the room light switch to the "OFF" position.
For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-88).

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: · When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range. · When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged. · When the doors are open or not closed
securely.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Type A (if so equipped)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(panic) button

LPD3600

LPD3602

Type B (if so equipped)

(remote engine start) button

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(panic) button

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the gent Key.

button on the Intelli-

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors and the tailgate (if so equipped) will be locked.

WARNING
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

1. Press the

button on the Intelligent

Key to unlock the driver's door.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the

button again within

1 minute to unlock all doors and tailgate

(if so equipped).

All doors and tailgate will be locked auto-

matically unless one of the following op-

erations is performed within 1 minute after

pressing the

button:

· Opening any doors.

· Pushing the ignition switch.

Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
· Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
· Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
· Switching the room light switch to the "OFF" position.

For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-88).

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.

To open the windows, press the

but-

ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than

3 seconds after all doors are unlocked

The door windows will open while pressing

the

button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key.

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:
· It has run for a period of time.
· Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
· The request switch (if so equipped) on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.
Trailer light check (if so equipped)
This functionality allows the customer to confirm trailer light operation, without the need of a second person to press the brake pedal or activate each turn signal light. The trailer light check can be performed by the Intelligent Key or through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

To activate the trailer light check function with your Intelligent Key, perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the button.

LOCK

3. Within 2 seconds, press and hold the LOCK button again for at least 2
seconds, until the horn beeps once and the park lights turn on.

The following events will occur:
· The left turn signal light on the vehicle and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.
· The right turn signal light on the vehicle and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.
· The brake lights on the vehicle and the trailer will turn ON for 5 seconds.

NOTE: If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the park lights will turn off after the events above occur. If ignition switch is in the ON position, lights will stay on for 45 seconds after trailer light check. If the trailer lights do not work properly, check the connections and bulbs. If the vehicle lights do not turn on, check the bulbs. If the trailer light check routine fails to start, ensure the following vehicle conditions:
· The vehicle is NOT moving, 0 mph (0 km/h)
· Brake switch is NOT depressed
· Left or right flasher is OFF
· Trailer light check configuration is NOT disabled and available in the meter towing settings
· The hazard switch is NOT turned ON
· The shift position is fully in P (Park) position
· Vehicle is within Remote Keyless Entry range

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and

buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and

buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2836
Intelligent Key button operation light
The light blinks only when you press any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illumination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has performed the intended operation. The number of blinks identifies each registered key (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for your own identification purposes. If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to be replaced. For additional information re-

garding the replacement of a battery, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-27).
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or chirp sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see "Troubleshooting guide" (P. 3-20) and "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom

Possible Cause

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

The "Shift to Park" warning appears on the vehicle information display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

When opening the driver's door to get out of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The "No Key Detected" warning appears on the vehicle information display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately three seconds.
The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times twice, or a Check Back Seat For All Articles warning appears on the display.

The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert is activated.

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately three seconds and all the doors The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. unlock.

Remedy Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Place the ignition switch in the ON position or close the driver's door.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Check the back seat for all articles, press the ENTER button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom

When pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or the
button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately three seconds.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the display.
The "Key ID Incorrect" warning appears on the vehicle information display .

Possible Cause The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
The battery charge is low. The Intelligent Key is not detected inside of the vehicle.

Remedy
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-27). Carry the registered Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

Start to have the vehicle in view or may restrict idling time except in freezing temperatures. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, see "Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work" (P. 3-24).
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key® system" (P. 3-9).

LPD2995

The

button will be on the NISSAN

Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote

Engine Start. This feature allows the engine

to start from outside the vehicle.

Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, see "Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control" (P. 4-39).

Laws in some local communities may restrict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine Start, or the amount of time a parked vehicle engine may idle. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· Do not use Remote Engine Start in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature to start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the

button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the

vehicle is not within view press and hold

the

button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:
· The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
· The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
· The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, see "Extending engine run time" (P. 3-23).

Press and hold the brake then push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, see "Driving the vehicle" (P. 5-18)).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the vehicle" in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
· The first 10 minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.
· The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
· Extending engine run time will count towards the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:

· Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press

until the parking lights turn off.

· Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

· Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.

· The extended engine run time has expired.

· The first 10 minute timer has expired.

· The engine hood has been opened.

· The shift lever is moved out of park.

· The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

· The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

· The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

· The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

· The hood is not securely closed.

· The hazard warning lights are on.

· The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

· The

button is not pressed and held

for at least 2 seconds.

· The

button is not pressed and held

within 5 seconds of pressing the lock but-

ton.

· The brake is pressed.

· The doors are not closed and locked.

· The Key System Error Light remains solid in the vehicle information display.

· The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

· Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.

· The vehicle is not in P (Park).

· There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
· The remote start function has been switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings for the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).
The Remote Engine Start Mode (if so equipped) may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOOD

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

1. Pull the hood lock release handle O1 lo-
cated below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2. Push the lever at the front of the hood to
the side O2 as illustrated with your fin-
gertips and raise the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

LPD3094
WARNING
· Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
· If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2593
King Cab® models only

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

LPD2594
King Cab® models only
CAUTION
Be careful when opening and exiting the driver's side rear door if the fuelfiller door is open. This may cause damage to the driver's side rear door or fuel-filler door if you open fully and they make contact.

GASOLINE FUEL ENGINES
WARNING

LPD3100

· Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

· Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

could also cause the

Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

· Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

· Do not fill a portable fuel container on a truck bed liner, rubber truck bed mat or other insulating material. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

Always place the container on the ground when filling.

Do not use electronic devices when filling.

Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

· Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. For additional information, see "Fuel recommendation" (P. 10-4).

· The Loose Fuel Cap warning mes-

sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap

is not properly tightened. It may take

a few driving trips for the message to

be displayed. Failure to tighten the

fuel-filler cap properly after the

Loose Fuel Cap warning message ap-

pears may cause the

Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

· Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu-

minate. If the

light illuminates

because the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the

light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

· For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-15).

· If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

LPD3101
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
O1 while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it clicks. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

STEERING WHEEL

LPD2985
Loose Fuel Cap warning
The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as previously described as soon as possible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a single click is heard.

WARNING
· Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
· Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if so equipped)

LPD2597

Tilt and telescopic operation
Push the lock lever O1 down:
· Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction O2 to the desired position.
· Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction O3 to the desired
position.
Pull the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2580
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so equipped)
Tilt and telescopic operation
To adjust the steering wheel move the
switch O1 in the following directions:
· Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction O2 to the desired tilt position.
· Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction O3 to the desired
telescopic position.

CAUTION
For vehicles with Memory Seat: Failure to reset the tilt and telescoping functions of the steering wheel, after the vehicle's battery has been discharged, may prevent the steering wheel position from being adjusted.
For vehicles with Memory Seat: Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle's battery has been discharged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic operation from locking in one position. When the battery has been recharged or replaced, perform the following:
· For tilt operation: Adjust the switch O1 so
the steering wheel moves to the highest
position O2 that can be reached.
· For telescopic operation: Adjust the
switch O1 so the steering wheel moves to
the most forward and backward position
O3 that can be reached.
Performing these operations resets the range of the steering wheel's tilt and telescopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)
The memory seat will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver's door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. The steering wheel moves back into position when the driver's door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed.
For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-40).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

SUN VISORS

1. To block glare from the front, swing
down O1 the sun visor.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side O2 . 3. To extend the sun visor, slide O3 in or out
as needed.

CAUTION
· Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
· Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD2583
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0344
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS

LPD2436
CARD HOLDER (driver's side only)
To access the card holder, slide card in the card holder. Do not view information while operating the vehicle.

WPD0126
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position O1 to reduce glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position O2 when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

LPD2418
Type A (if so equipped)
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

· To turn on the anti-glare feature, press the | button again. The indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, see "HomeLink® Universal Transceiver" (P. 2-89).
OUTSIDE MIRRORS

NOTE:

LPD0469
Type B (if so equipped)

Do not hang any objects over the sen-
sors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.
The indicator light O2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
· To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

WARNING
· Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
· Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LPD2581
Manual control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirrors can be moved in any direction for a better rear view.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust the top portion of the trailer tow mirror.
The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can be moved manually in any direction for a better rear view.

LPD2606
Electric control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
Rotate the control dial to select the right or left mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by moving the control dial.
Return the control dial to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

LPD2474
Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)
WARNING
Objects viewed in the convex portion of the trailer tow mirror are closer than they appear. Be careful when changing lanes or turning. Using only the convex mirror could cause an accident. Use the other mirrors or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

LPD0268
Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to the desired position for better visibility while towing a trailer.
WARNING
Do not extend or retract mirrors while driving. You may lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LPD3102
Type A (if so equipped)
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

CAUTION
Driving in tight spaces with mirrors extended may cause damage to the vehicle.
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0269
Type B (if so equipped)

LPD0417
Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors.
Push the power folding switch to open or close the mirrors.
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by

pushing the power folding switch until the mirrors are in the open position.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror control switch is in either the L or R position.
The mirrors automatically return to their original position when you shift out of R (Reverse).
The outside mirror surfaces will return to their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred: · The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse). · The outside mirror control switch is set to
the neutral or center position. · The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in the center position, the mirror surface will NOT turn downward when the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-40).
Automatic anti-glare outside mirror (if so equipped)
The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the O button on the rearview mirror. The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the anti-glare feature again, press the | button on the rearview mirror. The indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror, see "Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped)" (P. 3-31).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

TRUCK BOX

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see "Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch" (P. 2-42).

LPD3103
TAILGATE
Opening the tailgate
Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate open.
When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches are securely locked.
Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate down, unless equipped with NISSAN's Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the extended position.

For additional information on proper truck box loading, see "Vehicle loading information" (P. 10-22).
WARNING
· Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat (if so equipped) when it is in the folded position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove box and connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to avoid contamination which will lead to malfunction of the rear camera.
7. Remove the tailgate. For additional information, see "Removing the tailgate" (P. 3-38).

Disconnecting the rear camera
Before removing the tailgate disconnect the rear camera by performing the following:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
camera connector bracket O1 located
on the rear sill.
2. Remove the connector bracket O2 from
the sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the direction shown, while pulling the bracket apart.

LPD3095
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness
O3 by pressing inward on the locking
tab, in the direction shown, while pulling the connectors apart. Hold the connector firmly to prevent the connector in the chassis harness from falling into the sill.
4. Use the supplied chassis plug and bracket and connect them to the chassis wiring harness to avoid contamination to the terminals which will lead to malfunction of the rear camera.
5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

LPD3104
Removing the tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera. For additional information, see "Disconnecting the rear camera" (P. 3-37).
2. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION
· The tailgate is heavy. Two people should remove or install it. Be careful not to drop it during removal.
· After releasing the support cables, do not let the tailgate rest on the bumper.
3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.
4. Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge.
5. Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge.
Installing the tailgate
1. Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert into the left side hinge.
3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and attach the tailgate support cables.

4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be sure the tailgate harness is not hanging below the tailgate and keep the tailgate open. For additional information, see "Connecting the rear camera" (P. 3-39).
5. For vehicles without rear camera: Close the tailgate securely.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Connecting the rear camera
Before closing the tailgate reconnect the rear camera by performing the following:
1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the truck, keep the tailgate open and check that the tailgate harness is not hanging below the tailgate.
2. Remove the connector bracket O2 from
the sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the direction shown, while pulling the bracket apart.

LPD3095
3. Disconnect the chassis plug and bracket from the chassis wiring harness
O3 . Keep the connector and bracket in a
safe place such as the glove box.
4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tailgate plug in a safe place such as the glove box.
5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to the chassis wiring harness.
6. Securely fix the rear camera connector
bracket O1 to the rear sill.
7. Close the tailgate securely.

LPD3128
Locking the Tailgate
To unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward
the passenger side of the vehicle O1 . To lock, turn the key toward the driver side O2 .
If your vehicle is equipped with an electronic tailgate, you may use the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or I-key to lock or unlock the tailgate. For additional information please see "NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation" (P. 3-12).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

The memory seat system has two features:
· Memory storage function
· Entry/exit function

LPD3105
TIE DOWN HOOKS
For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box. · The weight of the cargo load must be
evenly distributed over the rear axles. · All cargo should be securely fastened
with ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle.
3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2302
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver's seat, steering column, and outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be stored in the Memory Seats. Follow these procedures to set the memory system.
1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position (the vehicle should be stopped while setting the memory).

2. Adjust the driver's seat, steering column, and outside mirrors (if so equipped) to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2), "Steering wheel" (P. 3-28) and "Outside mirrors" (P. 3-32).
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
4. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The chime will sound when the memory is stored.
NOTE:
If a NEW memory position is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory position will be overwritten by the new stored position.
Confirming memory storage
· Push the SET switch. · If a memory position has been stored in
the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the respective switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

LINKING A KEY FOB TO A STORED MEMORY POSITION
Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the following procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the "Memory storage function" section for storing the memory position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on. While the

indicator light is on for 5 seconds, press

the

button on the key fob. The haz-

ard lights will flash twice. The indicator

light of the linked memory switch will

blink and click twice. After the indicator

light goes off, the key fob is linked to that

memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is

in the OFF position, pressing the

but-

ton on the key fob will move the driver's

seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to

the linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the linked memory switch, then the key fob will link the new position and overwrites the previous position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver's seat and steering column will automatically move when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to easily get in and out of the driver's seat.
The driver's seat will slide backward and the steering column will move up:
· When the driver's door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
· When the ignition switch is changed from ACC to OFF with the driver's door open.
The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:
· When the ignition switch is changed from ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled through the vehicle settings in the vehicle information display by performing the following:
· Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.
· Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to OFF.

Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the stored memory positions will be lost and some of the functions will be restricted:
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).
OR
2. Open and close the driver's door more than two times with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function should now work properly.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The memory seat system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions: · When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(7 km/h). · When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the memory seat is operating. · When the switch for the driver's seat and steering column is pushed while the memory seat is operating. · When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position.

· When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.
· When the shift lever is moved from P (Park) to any other position.
The memory seat system can be adjusted and canceled. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-43

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to turn on and off predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-8 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Intelligent Around View Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-25 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Heater and air conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
USB/iPod® charging port (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 4-42
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) (if so equipped) . . . . 4-43 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Control description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Remote control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Remote control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Wireless headphone operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 DVD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 DVD playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 CD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 CD playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60 HDMI/MHL connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 USB/SD card operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Slingplayer® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68

Miracast® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Using the mobile application on your mobile device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 SmartStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84 Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
iPod®/iPhone® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER'S MANUAL
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner's Manual that includes the following information. · NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) · Navigation system (if so equipped) · Audio system · Apple CarPlay® · Android Auto TM · Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system · Viewing information · Other settings · Voice recognition · General system information
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button
WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

· RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

LHA5313
· The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

· The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. While in R (Reverse), pressing the CAMERA will cycle through guideline options. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

LHA5342
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle's license plate O1 on the
tailgate.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA5335
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
· Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) · Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) · Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle width guide lines O4
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines O5
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
Center guide lines O6
Indicates the vehicle's center.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA5336
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

LHA5337
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA5338
Backing up near a projecting object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5339
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the position OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING
· If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
· On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
· If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
· When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

LHA5340
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen OA when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA5341
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Press the CAMERA button.

LHA3522

2. Touch the "Display Settings" key.

3. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES
To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Press the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the "Predicted Course Lines" key to turn the feature ON or OFF.
To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines or center guide line while in the R (Reverse) position, press the CAMERA button.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show every object.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
· Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
· Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
· Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
· Make sure that the tailgate is securely closed when backing up.
· Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed on the tailgate.

· When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
· Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
· When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
· Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
· The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
· The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
· Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

· There may be a delay when switching between views.
· If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
· Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5342

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

LHA5313
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
· The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
· Front View An approximately 150degree view of the front of the vehicle.
· Rear View An approximately 150degree view of the rear of the vehicle.
· Bird's-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.
· Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.

LHA3909
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle's outside mirrors and one on the tail-
gate O1 .
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the camera is first activated with the bird's-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so equipped) will flash on the screen. This indicates that the sonar system (if so equipped) is activated. For additional information on the front and rear sonar system (if so equipped), see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-122).
The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
· The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

· Use the displayed lines and the bird's-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
· If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
· When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.
· Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.
· Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
· On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.

· The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
· The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Front view

SAA1840

Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line OA are
displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
· Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) · Yellow line O2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) · Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) · Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
(if so equipped)

Rear view
Vehicle width guide lines O5

LHA5343

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines O6

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Center guide lines O7
Indicates the vehicle's center.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines O6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

After the ignition switched is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area O2 is
highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the birds-eye view is displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and will blink for the first
3 seconds O3 to remind the driver to be
cautious.

LHA4264
Bird's-eye view
The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.
The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover
O2 are indicated in black.

WARNING
· Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
· Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.
· Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
· The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.
· A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
The extensions O3 of both the front O1 and side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted
line.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

LHA5336
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

LHA5338
Backing up near a projecting object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

· There is the possibility that when the vehicle mirrors are extended for towing, the mirrors may be shown in the bird's-eye view and front side view.

LHA5341
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: · Rear view/bird's-eye view split screen · Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are:
· Front view/bird's-eye view split screen
· Front view/front-side view split screen
The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when:
· The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
· A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

LHA5379

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Touch the "Settings" key.

3. Touch the "Camera" key.

4. Touch the "Display Settings" key.

5. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.

6. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
LHA3807
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the tailgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
· The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.
· The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the cameras.
· When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed O1 . When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the seam O2 of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
· There may be a delay when switching between views.
· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
· When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

· The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
· The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
· Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.
· There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird'seye view.
· Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA3591
System temporarily unavailable
When the "!" icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but it is recommended that the system be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O1 , the Intelligent Around
View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3592
When the "[X]" icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but it is recommended that the system be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA3909

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

LHA5313
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
· The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
· The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
· The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:
· When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
· When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.

LHA4190
Front and bird's-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
· When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird's-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5345
Rear and bird's-eye views
· When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.
· When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the tailgate is open.

NOTE:

LHA5346
Rear and front-side views
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

While the RCTA chime is beeping, the MOD system will not chime.
In the bird's-eye view, the yellow frame O1 is
displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame O2 is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
A blue MOD icon O3 is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon O3 is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Press the

button on the

steering wheel and select "Settings" in

the vehicle information display.

2. Using the

buttons, select "Driver

Assistance" and press the ENTER button.

3. Select "Parking Aids".

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

4. Toggle ON or OFF "Moving Object" using the ENTER button.
You can also turn the MOD on or off by pressing the Parking Aids system switch (if so equipped).
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
· Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
· The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.

When there is a blinking source of light.
When strong light such as another vehicle's headlight or sunlight is present.
When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.
When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.
When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
· The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
· The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
· If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.

· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.
NOTE: The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred:
· When the system is malfunctioning.
· When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink).
· When the Rear View camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O1 , the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA3909

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

VENTS

Adjust air flow direction for the driver's and
passenger's side vents O1 , center vents O2 ,
and rear passengers' vents (if so equipped)
O3 by moving the vent slide and/or vent
assemblies.

LHA3772

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

WARNING
· The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
· Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
· When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

Fan speed control dial / system

OFF dial / A/C (air conditioning) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C button

LHA4127

Air recirculation button

Outside mirror (if so equipped) de-

froster switch

Front windshield defrost button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Fan speed control dial

The

fan speed control dial turns the

fan on and off and controls fan speed.

Fan speed control dial -- OFF mode

Setting the

fan speed control dial to the

off position will turn off the fan and the air

recirculation indicator light will turn on. To

get fresh air in fan off mode, press the

air recirculation button to turn off the indica-

tor. In fan off mode, the mode buttons can be

selected to change the air vent distribution

(if the air recirculation mode is off).

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets.

MAX A/C

-- Air flows from center and side vents with maximum cooling.
-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets. -- Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets. -- Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on) Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the when:

button to the ON position

· driving on a dusty road.

· to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

· for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off) If outside air is desired in off mode, press the recirculation button until the indicator turns off.

If fogging occurs, press the windshield defrost button.

front

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Outside mirror defroster (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Rear window and/or outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" (P. 2-42).
HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets.

1. Press the

button to the OFF posi-

tion for normal heating. The indicator

light on the

button will go off.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

The indicator light on the

button

will go off.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the

defrost/defog button.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

· To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the

fan speed control dial

to the highest setting and the tempera-

ture control to the full HOT position.

· When the

position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the

outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The

mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the

defogging performance. Under this condition, the indicator light on the A/C button indicator will not turn on if the user had selected the A/C off. Turning off the air conditioning via the A/C button is not allowed In this mode. If the A/C button indicator was on when entering this mode, and the A/C button is selected in

this mode, the A/C button indicator will turn off, but the A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. The recircula-

tion button indicator will not illuminate if the button is pressed in this mode.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

The indicator light on the

button

will go off.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.

1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

· When the

position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). If the

air flow control

button is selected for more than 1 minute,

the air conditioning system will continue

to operate until the

fan speed con-

trol dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is

shut off, or the A/C button is used to turn

off the compressor even if the air flow

control dial is turned to a position other

than the

position. This dehumidi-

fies the air which helps defog the wind-

shield. Under this condition, the indicator

light on the A/C button indicator will not

turn on if the user had selected A/C off.

Turning off the air conditioning via the

A/C button is not allowed in this mode. If

the A/C button indicator was on when

entering this mode, and the A/C button is

selected in this mode, the A/C compres-

sor will still be automatically enabled. It is

recommended that

mode be

turned off for maximum defogging. The

recirculation button can be selected in

this mode to block outside odors. How-

ever, for maximum defogging in this

mode, it is recommended to turn recircu-

lation off when possible.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position, and

press the

button to activate the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is on,

cooling and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Press the

button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the cold position.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, press the

button to

the on position. Be sure to return the

to the off position for normal cooling. The

indicator light on the

button will go

off. You may also select MAX A/C for quick

cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

The indicator light on the

button

will go off.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Press the

button on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

front defroster button.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

When the

positions are se-

lected, the air conditioner automatically

turns on if the outside temperature is more

than 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system

will continue to operate until the

fan

speed control dial is turned to OFF, the air

conditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is

shut off. If a position other than the

front defrost air flow button is selected, the

A/C compressor will not turn off even if the

user had selected A/C off prior to entering

defrost. In

front defrost or

foot

defrost the indicator light on the A/C but-

ton will not turn on if the user had selected

A/C off. Turning off the air conditioning via

the A/C button is not allowed in this mode.

If the A/C button indicator was on when

entering this mode, and the A/C button is

selected in this mode, the A/C button indi-

cator will turn off, but the A/C compressor

will still be automatically enabled. This de-

humidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. The

mode automatically

turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn

into the passenger compartment to fur-

ther improve the defogging performance.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips
· Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
· After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
· The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.
· A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
· If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-12).

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. For additional information on heating and cooling, see "Heater and air conditioner (manual)" (P. 4-29). The air recirculation ( ) button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

LHA4486
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4487

LHA4488

LHA4489

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

LHA4490
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

Front defroster button

2. Temperature control dial (driver's side)/

AUTO button

3. Display screen

4. Temperature control dial (passenger's

side)/DUAL button

Fresh air intake button

Air recirculation button

WARNING

· The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

NOTE:

LHA3575

7. A/C (air conditioner) button

8. MODE (manual air flow control) button

Fan speed control buttons

10. ON-OFF button

11.

Rear window and/or

outside

mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch

· Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
· When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Driver and passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press the DUAL button to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger's side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger's temperature.
· Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

· The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off are also controlled automatically. The A/C button indicator will remain in the last user setting. Under this condition, the indicator light on the A/C button indicator will not turn on if the user had not selected the A/C button off. Turning off the air conditioning via the A/C button is not allowed in this mode. If the A/C button indicator was on when entering this mode, and the A/C button is selected in this mode, the A/C button indicator will turn off, but the A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. For additional information, see "Air flow control" (P. 4-40). To turn off the compressor, turn off auto mode, then turn the A/C on then off until the A/C button indicator is not lit.
· A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Heating
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or the right to set the desired temperature. Driver and passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press the DUAL button to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger's side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger's temperature.
· The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
· Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.
· Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the

defroster control button

to turn the system on. The indicator light

in the button will illuminate.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.

· To quickly remove ice from the outside of

the windows, press the

fan speed

control button to the maximum position.

· As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return

to the auto mode.

· When the

control is activated, the air

conditioner will automatically be turned

on at outside temperatures above 36°F

(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. Under this

condition, the indicator light on the A/C

button indicator will not turn on if the user

had selected A/C off prior to entering this

mode. Turning off the air condition via the A/C button is not allowed in this mode. If the A/C button indicator was on when

entering this mode, and the A/C button is selected in this mode, the A/C compressor will still be automatically enabled. The

air recirculation mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster, heated seat (if so equipped) and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if so equipped)

When the climate control system is on, the

front and rear (if so equipped) fan speeds

may be automatically lowered so that

commands are more easily recognized.

Fan speed can be adjusted using the fan

speed

decrease and

increase

buttons, if desired.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the

fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

When adjusting the manual fan from auto mode, the outlet direction (floor, floor/ defrost, vent, bi-level) will still automatically change. To fix the outlet to a manual mode, select the desired air flow location using the MODE button.

Air recirculation

Press the

air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle when:

· driving on a dusty road

· to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

· for maximum cooling when using the air conditioning system.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic mode.
The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh air intake button to enter fresh air mode.
In Floor/Defrost mode, the recirculation button can be selected to block outside odors. However, for maximum defogging in this mode, it is recommended to turn recirculation off when possible.

Fresh air intake

Press the

fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger com-

partment.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh air intake button to enter fresh air mode. The air recirculation indicator will turn off, the fresh air indicator will turn on.

To manually control the intake air, press the

fresh air intake button. To return to the

automatic control mode if the

fresh

air indicator is illuminated, press and hold

the

fresh air intake button for about 2

seconds. The fresh air indicator and air re-

circulation indicator lights will flash twice,

and then the intake air will be controlled

automatically. To return to the automatic

control mode if the

air recirculation

icon is illuminated, press and hold the

air recirculation button for about 2 sec-

onds. The

air recirculation indicator

and

fresh air intake indicator lights will

flash twice and the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control buttons to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control
Press the MODE button to manually control air flow and select the air outlet.
-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets. -- Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Rear window and/or outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, see "Rear window and/or outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" (P. 2-42).

LHA4126
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor (if so equipped) O1 , lo-
cated on the top center of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.
· When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.

· When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level mode, or side demist vent outlets for a maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when previous climate setting was system off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control button.
· Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT (if so equipped)

· If you feel that the air flow mode you have

selected and the outlets the air is coming

out do not match, select the

mode.

· When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-8).
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your "environmentally friendly" air conditioner system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

LHA4864
2nd row There is a USB/iPod® charging port located in the 2nd row on the back of the center console. This port will charge compatible devices.
NOTE:
The USB/iPod® charging port will not operate the display screen or the Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) (if so equipped). Only the USB connection port located in the console box will allow operation of USB/ iPod® devices through the audio system.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ANTENNA

REAR SEAT INFOTAINMENT (RSI) (if so equipped)

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod clockwise and hand tighten.
CAUTION
· Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation.
· Be sure that the antenna is removed before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

WARNING
· It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for a person to drive a motor vehicle which is equipped with a television monitor or screen that is visible, directly or indirectly, to the driver while operating the vehicle. In the interest of safety, the unit should never be installed where it will be directly or indirectly visible, by the operator of the motor vehicle.

· Enjoy your RSI system but remember that safety of all passengers remains the number one priority. Devices installed in the USB, HDMI, or headphone jack may protrude and create a potential eye impact hazard for unbelted passengers during a vehicle accident. To reduce the risk of injury, use only SD cards (hidden on left side of driver side monitor) or low-profile USB storage devices.

· If your vehicle is equipped with a wireless rear seat audio system or any other wireless infrared device, make sure it is powered off when operating the RSI system. If both systems are powered on at the same time, the two systems may obstruct each other, possibly creating undesirable audio interference through the wireless headphones.
· For safety reasons when changing discs, it is recommended that the vehicle is not in motion, and that you do not allow children to unfasten safety belts to change discs or make any adjustments to the system. System adjustments can be accomplished using the remote control, while safety belts remain fastened.

CAUTION
· Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the front panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the device.
· The LCD display screen is not touchscreen. Do not put pressure or add suction cups on the screen.
· Caution children to avoid touching or scratching the screen, as it may become dirty or damaged.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

· Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using the system. Using this system without running the engine can result in battery drain. To avoid the risk of battery drain, please remember to turn off the system when the vehicle is not in use.
WELCOME
Thank you for purchasing this advanced Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system with built-in Wi-Fi and DVD player. Before operating this system, read this section thoroughly and retain it for future reference.

· Infrared Wireless Headphones · Full-Function Slimline Remote Control · Monitor Screen Sharing

System features
· Twin 8-inch Color TFT-LCD Panels with 1024x600 Resolution
· Top-load DVD Player (Driver Side Only) · Internal Wi-Fi Network · Bluetooth® 4.1 Audio Streaming · Miracast®/Smart View Capability · SmartStream Content Sharing · USB 2.0 Port, SDXC Card Input · HDMI 1.4 Input with MHL 2.0 Support · Exclusive Slingplayer® Application · 3.5mm Stereo Headphone Output · Front Panel Capacitive Touch Controls

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

GETTING STARTED

LHA4871

Turning the monitor on or off

1. Press the

button on the top of the

monitor or the remote control to turn

the monitor on or off. When in use, the

front panel controls will illuminate.

2. After the monitor has been turned on and is displaying a picture, the up/down viewing angle can be adjusted to optimize the picture quality. Press the pushbutton latch located on the top of the monitor to pivot the screen.

Power up tips
1. After the ignition is turned on, there is a 12 second delay before the monitor (power) button is operable.
2. On some vehicles after the ignition is turned off, the system will continue to work for 10 minutes, or until the driver's door is opened.
3. Remember to turn the monitor off and pivot the screen to the locked (latched) position when not in use.
Audio options
Wireless headphones
Each monitor includes a built-in dual channel infrared transmitter for use with wireless headphones. The wireless headphones must be used within a line of sight from the transmitter as infrared signals, like visible light, travel only in a straight line.

How to use the wireless headphones
When placing the headphones on your head, make sure to observe the left and right orientation. The headphones must be oriented correctly (facing forward) to receive the audio signal. Press the
(power) button on the headphones, then select channel "A" to listen to monitor A, or channel "B" to listen to monitor B. Adjust the audio level using the volume control on each headphone.
Wired headphones
There is a 3.5mm stereo headphone output on each monitor which can be used with most standard stereo headphones (wired headphones sold separately).
Bluetooth® streaming audio
To listen to audio throughout the entire vehicle, the system includes the ability to stream audio over a Bluetooth® connection to the vehicle's stereo system.

When monitor A is selected as the source

to stream from, the audio output to the

wireless and wired headphones will be dis-

abled (only on monitor A). To use the wire-

less or wired headphones with monitor A,

you must turn off the Bluetooth® stream-

ing feature. To enable/disable Bluetooth®

streaming, navigate to the "SETTINGS"

menu, or press

on the remote control

during content playback. For additional in-

formation, see "Settings" (P. 4-73).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

LHA4873
Notes on discs
· To keep a disc clean, do not touch its surface. Handle the disc by its edge.
· Keep your discs in their cases or sleeves when not in use. Also, do not subject disc to heat/high temperature. Avoid leaving them in a parked vehicle or on a dashboard/rear tray.
· Do not attach labels, or use discs with sticky ink/residue. The following malfunctions may result from using such discs: Inability to eject a disc due to a label or sticker peeling off and jamming the disc mechanism.

LHA4874
Inability to read audio data correctly (i.e., playback skipping, or no playback) due to heat shrinking of a sticker or label causing a disc to warp.
· Before playing, clean the discs with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Wipe each disc from the center out. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or antistatic spray intended for analog discs.
· Use only normal, circular discs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play properly.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Region coding
DVD players and discs are coded by region. These regional codes must match in order for the disc to play. The system is preset to the region code designated for your area by the DVD Copy Control Association. Other regions may not be played in this system.
Supported disc types
DVD-Video: DVD contains video DVD +/- R: DVD contains video CD-DA: CD contains audio CD-Video: CD contains video CD-R/RW: CD contains audio
Unsupported disc types
Super Audio CD Optical disc CD-1 CD-ROM DVD-ROM DVD-RAM DualDisc DIVX MiniDisc AVCHD HD DVD Blu-ray

Loading and playing discs

Press the

(power) button to turn the

monitor on. Insert the disc about halfway

into the disc compartment slot on the driv-

er's side monitor, with the disc's label facing

the rear of the vehicle. Do NOT insert the

disc at an angle. The disc must be inserted

straight into the player.

The disc will load automatically and begin to play. Some discs may start at the root menu, where playback must be selected to start a movie. Depending on the disc and playback location on the disc, a " " icon may be displayed in the upper-left corner of the screen indicating that playback is not possible during certain times.

DVD playback will automatically play on each monitor if there is no content already playing. You may also select "DVD" from the source menu to begin DVD playback mode.

Media compatibility
For a list of compatible media formats for this system, see "Storage device formatting" (P. 4-47).
· The metadata or file information of some audio and video files may not be correctly displayed.
· It is not possible to play content that is protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management).
· There may be a delay before playback begins when using USB flash drives or SD cards with complex folder hierarchies or many files.
· Some audio, video, and image files may be incompatible with this system due to file characteristics, file format, recording software used, directory structure, and/or the type of audio/video encoding used.

Storage device formatting
This system is compatible with several types of formatting for USB flash drives and SD cards. Refer to the documentation that comes with your storage device for more details on how to format.
FAT32 - USB and SDHC Good for smaller capacity storage devices, but individual files on the drive must be <4GB. This format is good for music and images.
EX-FAT - USB and SDXC Better choice for larger capacity storage devices with files that are >4GB. This format is better for larger files such as full-length movies.
NTFS - USB and SDXC Best choice for very large capacity storage devices - with no limitations on file size. This format can be used for all file sizes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Supported Formats

Format

Extension

Supported Variations/Codecs

ASF

.wmv

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, WMV

AVI

.avi

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, Xvid, WMV

VIDEO

MP4

.mp4, .m4v

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2

Matroska

.mkv

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2, WMV

MPEG

.mpg, .mpeg, .vob

H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2

AAC

.m4a, .aac

ASF

.wma

WMA, WMA Lossless, WMA Voice, WMA Pro

FLAC

.flac

FLAC 1.2.1

AUDIO

Matroska

.mka

MPEG

.mp1, .mp2, .mp3

MPEG-1 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3, MPEG-2/2.5 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3

OGG

.ogg

WAV

.wav

BMP

.bmp

GIF

.gif

PHOTO

JPEG PNG

.jpg, .jpeg .png

TIFF

.tiff, .tif

WebP

.webp

Video Profiles Supported: ASF: WMV7, WMV8, WMV9; H.264: Baseline, Main, Extended, High MPEG-2 Part 2: Simple, Main, High; MPEG-4 Part 2: Simple, Advanced Simple Profile, Xvid

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4875

Monitor A (Drivers Side) With DVD

CONTROL DESCRIPTION
1. SD Card Slot Play videos, music, and images stored on most SD cards. The full-size SD card slot is accessible on the left side of the moni-

tor when the screen is in the open position.
2. Eject Press this button to eject a disc.

3. Screen latch Press the push-button latch located on the top of the monitor to pivot the screen. Remember to turn the monitor off and pivot the screen to the locked (latched) position when not in use.
4. Disc slot Play DVDs and CDs using standard size DVD or CD discs.
5. Power (Monitor A) Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press again to turn the monitor off. Press and hold for 6 seconds to reset the system (Monitor A only)
Power (Monitor B) Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press again to turn the monitor off.
6. Front panel controls Capacitive-touch buttons provide user interface navigation, Select, Back, and Home functions.
7. Monitor screen display Includes an 8-inch TFT Liquid Crystal Display with 1024 x 600 resolution.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

10. Headphone output jack Connect wired headphones using a 3.5mm stereo connector.

LHA4876

Monitor B (Passenger's Side) Without DVD

8. HDMI port Connect an external audio/video source using a full-size HDMI connector. Supports MHL 2.0 playback and charging.

9. USB 2.0 port Play videos, music, and images stored on most USB devices. Provides up to 2 amps of output to charge most mobile devices.

CAUTION
· Do not use any harsh solvents or chemicals when cleaning the monitor.
· Do not use any abrasive cleaners that may scratch the screen. Use only a lightly dampened lint free cloth to wipe the screen if it is dirty.
· The LCD display screen is not touchscreen. Do not put pressure or add suction cups on the screen.
· Caution children to avoid touching or scratching the screen, as it may become dirty or damaged.
· Place the monitor in the fully closed position when not in use.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4877
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Before use
Before attempting to operate your remote control, turn the remote control face down and remove the battery insulator by pulling the clear plastic tab away from the remote control.
Replacing the battery
1. Turn the remote control face down. Use a coin to turn the battery cover counterclockwise and remove it.

LHA4878
2. Replace the battery with a CR2032 or equivalent. Make sure that proper polarity is observed. The positive (+) side of the battery should face upwards.
3. Place the cover back into position and turn it clockwise until it locks into place.
The remote control will only operate this device. It is not a universal remote control and will not control other equipment.

WARNING
· Always ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct direction as shown in the battery compartment.
· When the battery fails to function, replace it immediately.
· Keep the battery out of the reach of children. In case the battery is accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. Also, when disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution rules that apply in your country/area.
· Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer.
· Storage in extreme cold can weaken the battery. Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

LHA4879
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS
1. Power Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press again to turn the monitor off.

2. Monitor A Press this button to transmit the remote control codes and functions to operate monitor A (Driver side).
3. Directional pad Press these buttons to increase/ decrease the volume or navigate up/ down when displaying a menu or file list.
4. Home Press this button to return to the home screen.
5. Back Press this button to go back to the previous screen.
6. Monitor B Press this button to transmit the remote control codes and functions to operate monitor B (Passenger side).
7. Select Press this button to make a selection when displaying a menu or file list.
8. Menu Press this button to open the context menu (when available).

NOTE: You must first select the desired monitor (press A or B) to control it. Example - Press A, then press Power to turn monitor A on/off.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WIRELESS HEADPHONE OPERATION

LHA4880
Installing the batteries
Before attempting to operate the headphones, install the batteries as described below:
1. Use a coin to remove the headphone battery cover

2. Install two "AAA" batteries into the headphones. Make sure that proper polarity (+ or -) is observed.
3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.
Headphone operation
Press the power button on the headphones to turn on and off the headphones. The red LED will illuminate when the headphone is turned on. Set the select switch to "A" or "B" for use with the "A" monitor or "B" monitor respectively. Use the volume thumb wheel to adjust the volume level for the headphone audio.
NOTE: If the headphones are accidentally left on and system is powered off, a battery saver feature will automatically turn off the headphones after approximately 3 minutes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

CAUTION
· Always ensure that the batteries are inserted with the positive and negative terminals in the correct direction as shown in the battery compartment.
· Different types of batteries have different characteristics. Do not mix different types.
· Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries will shorten battery life and/or cause chemical leaks from the old batteries.
· When batteries fail to function, replace them immediately.
· Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. In case the batteries are accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. Also, when disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution rules that apply in your country/area.
· Remove the batteries if the headphones are not used for a month or longer.

LHA4882

GENERAL OPERATION

Navigating menus

When fully powered on, the Home screen

can be accessed at any time by pressing

the

button on the remote control, or

the

button on the monitor.

The main menu is located on the far-left side of the screen and allows users to select a source, change settings, USB fastcharge certain devices, and mirror content playing from the opposite monitor.

To the right of the main menu is a preview menu, which gives a preview of the highlighted option in the main menu. The preview menu options will change with each selection.

Press

to scroll through the

options in each menu. The current selec-

tion is highlighted in the center of the menu

when scrolling up and down. Press

when an item is highlighted to select

the item. Press

to move back

one level in the menu.

Mirror
For additional information on how to mirror content playing from the opposite monitor, see "Mirroring content" (P. 4-56) and "Using Miracast®" (P. 4-71).

Fast-Charge (USB) For additional information, see "FastCharge (USB)" (P. 4-62).

Settings For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 4-73).

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4883
Sources
The following sources can be accessed from the main menu:
DVD Play DVD movies and audio CDs using standard size DVD or CD discs.
HDMI Play content from an external audio/video source.
USB Play videos, music, and images stored on most USB devices.

SD CARD Play videos, music, and images stored on most SD cards.
Slingplayer® Stream content wirelessly from a Slingbox® (sold separately) to the RSI system. *Requires external internet connection.
Miracast® Stream content wirelessly from a Miracastenabled device to the RSI system.
SmartStream Stream content wirelessly between mobile devices and to the RSI system. *Requires compatible UPnP application to be installed on the mobile device. For additional information, see "SmartStream" (P. 4-71).
NOTE: The top left corner of the screen includes a graphic representation that shows the navigational path of the current menu. For example: Home > Source > DVD.

LHA4885

DVD OPERATION

Volume control

Volume level can be adjusted by pressing

any time video is playing, or by

selecting the volume icon in the playback

controls menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

NOTE: For hearing protection, there is a maximum volume setting to limit the audio output of the front panel 3.5mm headphone output. Using the directional pad on the remote navigate to "SETTINGS" then "AUDIO" then "HEADPHONES" to adjust the maximum volume. Once set, the maximum volume is limited to this setting.

LHA4886
Playing a disc
Insert a disc into the top slot of monitor A with the label facing the rear of the vehicle. If the disc is supported and there is no content already playing, the disc will automatically begin playing.
When a disc is inserted, playback will automatically begin on both monitors A and B (if there is no content already playing). If a disc was previously inserted, using the directional pad on the remote select "SOURCE", then "DVD" from the Home screen to begin or resume playback.

Some DVDs may start at the root menu, where playback must be selected to start a movie. Use the remote control or front panel buttons to navigate through the DVD menu and begin playback.
The system supports DVD parental controls that provide the ability to limit content playback based on the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) ratings. For additional information, see "About parental lock" (P 4-79).
Mirroring content
To mirror the content of the opposite monitor, using the directional pad on the remote, select "MIRROR" from the Home Screen. This will allow the identical content to play on both monitors.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

DVD PLAYBACK CONTROLS

During video playback, press

to dis-

play the playback controls. Press

to navigate the controls. Press

select the highlighted function or option.

The playback controls will disappear after

approximately 5 seconds of no activity.

LHA4888

1. Context Menu

Press

on the remote to open the

context menu. The menu options will

vary, depending on the source.

2. Progess Bar Shows elapsed time, total time, and video progress bar indicator.

3. Volume

Select to display the volume level indica-

tor. Press

to increase or

decrease the volume.

4. Night Mode Select to dim the screen and reduce eye strain during operation at night.

5. Previous Select to go to the beginning of the chapter. Select again to go to the previous chapter.

6. Rewind

Select to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x

speeds. Select

to resume playback.

7. Stop Select to stop DVD playback and return to the menu.

8. Play/Pause Select once to pause DVD playback. Select again to resume DVD playback.

9. Fast Forward

Select to fast forward at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x

speeds. Select

to resume playback.

10. Next Select to go to the next chapter.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

11. Repeat Select once to repeat the entire DVD. Select again to repeat the currently playing chapter one time.
12. Eject Select to eject the disc.

LHA4889

Context menu

Press

on the remote to open the con-

text menu during DVD playback. The con-

text menu provides options to adjust the

display settings, audio settings, subtitle

settings, and multicast (on/off). Press

to select or toggle the highlighted item on

the menu. Press

to exit the context

menu.

Display settings
Brightness is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default.

Contrast is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default. Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default. Aspect Ratio is adjustable between Pan & Scan, Letter Box, Widescreen, and Default.
Audio settings
The Audio settings allow you to set the default audio language for DVD playback. If the selected language is included on the DVD, the selected audio will be heard in that language.
Preferred language
Preferred Language is selectable between English, French, Spanish, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Dutch, Portuguese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Arabic, and Default. The preferred language must be included on DVD in order for it to be displayed. Refer to the DVD jacket for more information.
Language switch
Language Switch provides the ability to select between various audio streams (languages) included on a DVD. Audio streams must be included on the DVD to be heard.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4890
Subtitle settings
The Subtitle settings allow you to set the default subtitle language for DVD playback. If the selected subtitle language is included on the DVD, the selected subtitle audio will be displayed during movie playback.
Subtitle switch
Subtitle Switch (Off/On) allows the subtitles to be displayed during DVD playback.

Preferred Language
Preferred Language is selectable between English, French, Spanish, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Dutch, Portuguese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Arabic, and Default. The preferred language must be included on DVD in order for it to be displayed. Refer to the DVD jacket for more information.
Language Switch
Language Switch provides the ability to select between the various subtitles included on a DVD. Subtitles must be included on the DVD to be seen during DVD playback.
Multicast
Multicast (Off/On) provides the ability to watch a DVD over the built-in Wi-Fi network using an application installed on a mobile device. When turned on, the DVD content will be "cast" over the network to allow users with multiple mobile devices to enjoy the same movie. *Requires application to be installed on the mobile device.

Bluetooth
Selecting "BLUETOOTH" allows the Bluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, audio source selection, and lip-sync adjustments. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming" (P. 4-78) and "Lip-Sync adjustment" (P. 4-78).
CD OPERATION

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

LHA4891

CD PLAYBACK CONTROLS

During audio playback the controls are displayed at all times.

1. Context Menu

Press

on the remote to open the

context menu. The menu options will

vary, depending on the source.

2. Progress Bar Shows elapsed time, total time, and progress bar indicator.

3. Volume

Select to display the volume level indica-

tor. Press

to increase or

decrease the volume.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Night Mode Select to dim the screen and reduce eye strain during operation at night.

5. Previous Select to go to the beginning of the track. Select again to go to the previous track.

6. Rewind Select to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x speeds. Select to resume playback.

7. Stop Select to stop CD playback.

8. Play/Pause Select once to pause CD playback. Select again to resume CD playback.

9. Fast Forward

Select to fast forward at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x

speeds. Select

to resume playback.

10. Next Select to go to the next track.

11. Repeat Select once to repeat the entire CD. Select again to repeat the currently playing track.

12. Eject Select to eject the disc.

LHA4892

HDMI/MHL CONNECTION

HDMI connection

Display content from an external source connected to the system using the HDMI port located on the front of monitor A. A standard HDMI cable is required (sold separately).

To access the HDMI source, using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to HDMI in the menu. When HDMI is highlighted, a preview of the HDMI input will be displayed in the preview screen.

Press

to return to the source menu.

NOTE: HDMI connected devices are independent and must be controlled directly from the source device.
MHL connection
The system also allows mobile devices supporting Mobile High-Definition Link (MHL) to be connected. An MHL-to-HDMI cable is required (sold separately).
Mobile High-Definition Link (MHL) is an industry standard mobile audio/ video interface that allows connection of smartphones, tablets, and other portable consumer electronics devices to the system. MHL transports high-quality uncompressed audio and video from a mobile source device to the system and at the same time provides power to recharge the device.
NOTE:
MHL connected devices are independent and must be controlled directly from the source device.

LHA4893
USB operation
Insert a USB device into the USB port located on the front of monitor A. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "USB" in the menu. When USB is highlighted, music, video and photo icons will appear in the preview menu to the right. The front panel USB port provides up to 2 amps of output to charge most mobile devices. Please note this system does not support USB data transfer or audio/ video playback from mobile devices.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

NOTE: When inserting a USB storage device with a large library of content, there may be a delay before the content is accessible.

LHA4894
Fast-Charge (USB)
Fast-Charge allows you to charge certain USB devices faster than normal. To enable, using the directional pad on the remote, select "FAST-CHARGE" when highlighted in the main menu. The USB icon will display a green lightning bolt when active.
NOTE: Enabling the Fast-Charge mode disables the USB port from reading data or content from USB devices. When selecting USB as the source, the FastCharge feature is automatically disabled.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4899
USB/SD CARD OPERATION
SD card operation
Insert a full-size SD card into the SD card slot located on the left side monitor A. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "SD CARD" in the menu. When SD Card is highlighted, music, video and photo icons will appear in the preview menu to the right.

Basic navigation
USB and SD card are characterized by three different categories which are videos, music, and photos. Each media type will show a preview of the available content. After selecting a media type, navigate the content, and select the desired file or photo. When a media item is highlighted, the preview image is enlarged and surrounded by a white border. If available, the item's metadata (video title, filename, or photo name) will be displayed in the information bar at the bottom of the screen.

Context menu

Press

on the remote while navigating

content to open the context menu. The

context menu provides options to adjust

the page view, sorting, and searching. The

options will vary, depending on the content.

Press

to select or toggle the high-

lighted item on the menu. Press

to exit

the context menu.

Page view -- music and videos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "PAGE VIEW" to change between List or Grid. List provides an alphanumeric text listing of all content, whereas Grid provides an alphanumeric thumbnail graphic view of the content.

LHA4896
Page view -- photos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "PAGE VIEW" to change between Grid, Overview, Slideshow, or Full Screen. Grid provides a large thumbnail graphic view, whereas Overview provides a small thumbnail graphic view of the content. Slideshow will play photos in sequence and Full Screen fills the entire screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

LHA4897

Search provides an easy way to find and

play content by name. Using the directional

pad on the remote, select "SEARCH" to dis-

play the on-screen keyboard. Use the di-

rectional pad to navigate the keyboard and

enter the first few characters of the file-

name. Once the desired file is displayed,

press

to hide the keyboard. Press

to begin playback.

Sorting -- videos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SORTING" to select between Title, Rating, Year, Filename, or Genre.
Sorting -- music
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SORTING" to select between Artist, Album, Year, Filename, Song, or Genre.
Sorting -- photos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SORTING" to select between Date or Filename.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB/SD card video playback controls

During video playback, press

to dis-

play the playback controls. Press

to navigate the controls. Press

select the highlighted function or option.

LHA4898

The playback controls will disappear after approximately 5 seconds of no activity.

1. Context Menu

Press

on the remote to open the

context menu. The menu options will

vary, depending on the source.

2. Progress Bar Shows elapsed time, total time and video progress bar indicator.

3. Volume

Select to display the volume level indica-

tor. Press

to increase or

decrease the volume.

4. Night Mode Select to dim the screen and reduce eye strain during operation at night.

5. Previous Select to go to the beginning of the chapter. Select again to go to the previous chapter.

6. Rewind

Select to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x

speeds. Select

to resume playback.

7. Stop Select to stop DVD playback and return to the menu.

8. Play/Pause Select once to pause DVD playback. Select again to resume DVD playback.

9. Fast Forward

Select to fast forward at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x

speeds. Select

to resume playback.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

10. Next Select to go to the next chapter.
11. Repeat Select once to repeat the entire DVD. Select again to repeat the currently playing chapter one time.

LHA4899

Playing videos

Using the directional pad on the remote,

select "VIDEOS" to navigate the content.

When a media item is highlighted in Grid

mode, the preview image is enlarged and

surrounded by a white border. The video

title will be displayed in the information bar

at the bottom of the screen. Press

begin playback. When choosing a video

that has previously been started, a "Re-

sume" option is available.

Context menu

Press

on the remote to open the con-

text menu during playback. The context

menu provides options to adjust the dis-

play settings, aspect settings, and

Bluetooth® settings. Press

to select or

toggle the highlighted item on the menu.

Press

to exit the context menu.

Display settings
Brightness is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default. Contrast is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default. Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default. Aspect is adjustable between Preserve, Crop, and Stretch.

Bluetooth® settings
Selecting "BLUETOOTH" allows the Bluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, audio source selection, and lip-sync adjustments. For additional information, see "Lip-Sync adjustments" (P. 4-78).

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4920

Playing music

Navigating through a music library is identical to navigating through the video library. The default sorting option for music is Artist. Selecting an artist will then sort by Album and will display all available albums by that artist. There is also an option to Play ALL albums from the selected artist.

Select an album to display all songs in the

album. Press

to navigate the

songs. Press

to begin playback.

LHA4901

During playback, press

to select the

Now Playing screen. The Now Playing

screen includes the following controls: Pre-

vious Song, Next Song, Rewind, Fast-

Forward, Play/Pause, Shuffle, Repeat, Vol-

ume Control, and Night mode.

Press

to return to the Playlist screen.

The audio will continue to play while navi-

gating the playlist screen. The system will

return to the Now Playing screen after ap-

proximately 15 seconds of no activity.

LHA4902

Navigating photos

To view photos, using the directional pad

on the remote navigate to "SOURCE" then

"USB" or "SD CARD" then "PHOTOS" from the

home screen. Storage device must be con-

nected to display to read media. Use the

directional pad to highlight the photo then

press

to view.

Highlight the vertical arrows on menu to access the page selector feature to quickly scan photos.

Press

to highlight additional options

including Sorting, Page View, Set As Back-

ground, and Search.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Sorting lets you arrange the photos by filename or date.
Page View allows the user to view photos in Fullscreen, Grid, Overview, or Slideshow.
Set As Background sets the selected photo as the home screen background.
Search prompts the user to input a filename or date to find a photo.
SLINGPLAYER®

Using Slingplayer®
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "SLINGPLAYER" in the menu. The first use of Slingplayer® will prompt you for login credentials. Use the remote control to navigate the on-screen keyboard and enter the e-mail address and password associated with your Slingplayer® account.

LHA4903
About Slingplayer®
A Slingbox® (sold separately) connects to your home network and sits between your cable or set-top box and your TV. When accessed remotely, your Slingbox® slings your content to the RSI system. To use Slingplayer®, an external internet connection is required. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74) to enable Client Mode in the Wi-Fi Settings and allow the system to connect to a Wi-Fi hotspot.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Number · Miscellaneous

Slingplayer® options

LHA4904

Once logged in, the main Slingplayer® menu page is displayed with 3 options:

1. Select "DIRECTORY" to watch live television from a Slingbox®.

2. Select "SETTINGS" to change the settings of the Slingplayer® application.

3. Select "HELP" to display information on how to properly use the Slingplayer® application.

LHA4905

Connect to a live video stream

Press

to access the navigational

menu that will display two sets of Menu

Control Bars. The upper Menu Control Bar

displays types of controls. Press

select the desired type of control. Press

to hide the menus and return to the

live stream.

Slingplayer® control options include: · Main · DVR · Directional Pad

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

LHA4907

Accessing the program guide

Press

to display the upper and lower

Menu Control Bar for Slingplayer®. By de-

fault, the "Main" icon on the upper Menu

Control Bar is highlighted, showing the

"Main" menu options in the lower Menu

Control Bar. Press

to navigate

to the lower options and select "GUIDE".

This will launch the Program Guide. Once

the guide has loaded, use the directional

pad and press

to select the desired

channel or program. Press

multiple

times or

to exit.

LHA4906

Exiting Slingplayer®

There are two ways to exit the Slingplayer®

application. Press

while on the

main screen to return to the main menu.

When exiting the application, you will be

prompted to confirm: "Are you sure you

want to exit Slingplayer? There will be no

data usage once exited". Select "Yes" to re-

turn to the Home Screen or select "No" to

return to the stream.

Connection quality
The quality of a mobile network connection, whether it's Wi-Fi or a mobile hotspot can vary, due to network conditions. Connection speed and bandwidth can fluctuate, creating conditions that aren't optimal for smooth streaming.
Slingbox® compatibility
The following legacy Slingbox® devices are not supported: Slingbox PRO, Slingbox AV, Slingbox TUNER, Slingbox Classic.
Visit www.slingbox.com for more information on Slingbox or where to purchase.
MIRACAST®

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4908
About Miracast®
Miracast® is a dedicated wireless connection technology that allows content streaming between a mobile device and the RSI system. The connection is made without cables or a network connection. It provides the ability to "cast" (display) content, such as images or videos from the mobile device to the RSI system. There is no need for an external internet connection and the ability to connect is inside Miracast-certified devices.

Using Miracast®
Using the directional pad on the remote select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "MIRACAST" in the menu. "Ready to Connect" will be displayed. Enable Screen Mirroring on the mobile device and look for "RSI-Miracast" in the list of possible devices to connect to. Note that Miracast® may be labeled differently, depending on the mobile device and its operating system. If Miracast® is not available, look for Smart View or Screen Mirroring in the settings menu of your mobile device. Remember to end your Miracast® connection when finished to avoid draining the battery of your mobile device.
This screen must be active to be able to connect your mobile device to the monitor.
Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Miracast® certified devices.
USING THE MOBILE APPLICATION ON YOUR MOBILE DEVICE
Download the free "VOXX-RSI" mobile application on your mobile device from Apple iTunes or Google Play store. A full version of the RSI Owner's Manual is also included within the mobile application.

WARNING
THIS MOBILE APP IS NOT FOR DRIVER USE
To reduce risk of a crash which can result in death or serious injury, always drive carefully and in accordance with traffic laws. The driver should not use the mobile app while the vehicle is in motion. Mobile app use may only be exercised by the driver after you have stopped your vehicle in an appropriate location permitted by law. The mobile app is specifically designed to be used by passengers other than the driver, provided it does not interfere with driving, and does not distract the driver's attention to the road.
SMARTSTREAM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

LHA4909
About SmartStream
SmartStream is a wireless connection technology that allows content streaming between a mobile device and the RSI system and between mobile devices. Content is streamed over the built-in Wi-Fi network using an application installed on a mobile device. There is no need for an external internet connection.
Using SmartStream
Before using the SmartStream feature, a compatible UPnP application is required to be downloaded and installed on your mo-

bile device. To stream content from a mobile device, you must first connect it to the RSI network.
Connecting a mobile device to the RSI network:
1. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and then select "SMARTSTREAM" in the menu. A device connection screen will be displayed on the monitor.
2. Navigate to the "Wi-Fi" settings menu of the mobile device and establish a connection to the network named "RSI-WiFi".
3. When prompted, enter the network password to join the RSI-WiFi network. Select the Show Password check box in the Wi-Fi Settings menu to display the current password. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74).
NOTE: Access Point must be selected to use the SmartStream feature. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74).

LHA4910
Streaming content from a mobile device:
1. Once connected, launch the application, and select SmartStream on the mobile device.
2. Choose the desired monitor to stream to by selecting Monitor A or Monitor B. Note: To stream content from a mobile device the monitor must be set to SmartStream in the source menu.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Select the desired source content from the list of available devices. Content can be browsed from all devices that are connected to the RSI Wi-Fi network and have a compatible UPnP application installed.

4. After selecting a content source, navigate through the folders, and select the desired file to stream to the monitor. Once the file is selected, it will begin streaming to the monitor that was selected in step 2 above.

5. Playback controls are available from the

Now Playing screen in the UPnP applica-

tion and from the monitor. Press

display the playback controls on the

monitor.

NOTE:
· Content protected with DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be streamed using the SmartStream feature.
· A wired connection (HDMI or MHL) is required to stream protected content from a mobile device to the RSI system. For additional information, see "HDMI/ MHL connection" (P. 4-61).

LHA4911
SETTINGS
The following settings can be accessed from the main menu:
Wi-Fi Change the SSID (network name), change the password of the network, and toggle between Client Mode or Access Point.
Read Back A text-to-speech aid that enables the system to read text items displayed on the screen. This feature guides the user through operating the RSI system.

Display Adjust Brightness, Contrast, and Sharpness settings.
Audio Select the monitor to use for Bluetooth® audio streaming and set the maximum volume level when using wired headphones.
Advanced Change the language of the GUI (Graphic User Interface), reset the RSI system, and update the software.
Customize Change the background image of the home screen using content from an SD card or USB storage device.
Parental Set or change the password to limit DVD content playback using parental control based on the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) ratings.
Bluetooth Control Bluetooth® audio streaming (On/ Off) and select from the available list of paired devices.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

LHA4912
Using Wi-Fi
Access Point Access Point is used when connecting other mobile devices to the RSI's built-in internal network. This mode allows the RSI system to connect to devices "inside" the vehicle, using an optional UPnP application installed on a mobile device.
To change the SSID, navigate the keyboard and enter the desired network name. Select Enter when complete. The default SSID name is RSI-WiFi.

To change the network password, navigate the keyboard and enter the desired numeric password. Select Enter when complete. Select the Show Password check box to display the current password. Select Save to save the SSID and password.
Client Mode Client Mode is used when connecting the RSI system to an external network or to the internet using a mobile hotspot. This mode allows the RSI system to connect "outside" the vehicle.

Enable Client mode by highlighting the Sta-

tus switch. The switch will turn green when

on. The RSI system will begin searching for

available wireless networks and display

them below. Navigate to the desired net-

work and press

to select it. Enter the

password (if necessary) to complete the

connection. The system will automatically

connect to the last connected network un-

til Client Mode is disabled.

NOTE: Client mode will use data from the external Wi-Fi connection. Use with care as additional data is consumed when using mobile device data plans.

LHA4913

Using Read Back*

Enable the Read Back feature by highlight-

ing the Status switch. The switch will turn

green when on. Highlight the Save button

and press

to enable Read Back. When

enabled, the RSI system will read the text of

menu items displayed on the screen, pro-

viding audible guidance on how to use the

system. A blue bar will also appear at the

top of each screen indicating the Read

Back feature is enabled.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Speech Volume Speech Volume can be adjusted to match the media volume (spoken text volume is the same volume level as the content being played). To reduce the Speech Volume to be lower than the volume level content being played, set it to 75%, 50%, or 25% of the media volume.
Speech Rate Speech Rate can be adjusted between Normal, Fast, or Slow. This setting controls how fast the spoken text is pronounced.
*Complies with FCC/Accessibility rule 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA).

LHA4914
Display settings
Brightness Brightness is a measurement of the amount of light the monitor produces. For displaying movies, a brighter luminance rating is desirable. Select between Low, Medium, High, and Default (High).
Contrast Contrast is a ratio of difference of the monitor's ability to produce bright whites and dark blacks. Select between Low, Medium, High, and Default (High).

Sharpness
Sharpness is edge contrast that is visible along edges of content. Decreasing the sharpness will create a softer image. Increasing the sharpness will affect the contrast only along/near edges of the image while leaving smooth areas of the image alone. Select between Low, Medium, High, and Default (Low).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

LHA4915
Audio settings
Headphones For hearing protection, there is a maximum volume setting to limit the audio output of the front panel 3.5mm headphone output. Select the desired maximum volume from 0 ~ 100 and select Save to store the value.
Bluetooth Source When Bluetooth® is enabled and a connection is established to the vehicle's stereo system, choose the monitor to be used as the source to stream audio from. Select Monitor A to stream audio from the Driver side monitor or select Monitor B to stream

LHA4916
audio from the Passenger side monitor. Select OK to confirm and store the desired monitor.
NOTE:
· When monitor A is selected as the source to stream from, the audio output to the wireless and wired headphones will be disabled (only on monitor A).
· To use the wireless or wired headphones with monitor A, you must turn off the Bluetooth® streaming feature. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming" (P. 4-78).

LHA4917
Advanced settings
Language The system language used for the GUI (Graphic User Interface) can be changed to any of the following languages English, Spanish, French, Arabic, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, and Hebrew. To change the language, highlight and select the current language and a drop-down list will appear containing the available languages. Choose the desired language and select Save to display the confirmation dialog box. Select Yes to confirm and reboot the RSI system.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Reset A master reset will return the RSI system settings to the factory defaults. Any user options and customization will be lost and reset back to factory default settings. To reset the system, select Yes when the dialog confirmation box appears.
Update Displays the current software version information. Select Update to begin a software update (reserved for future use).

NOTE:
· Each monitor can have its own background image.
· The Local source stores the 10 most recent background images.
· To restore the default background image, perform a factory reset. For additional information, see "Advanced settings" (P. 4-76).

LHA4918

Customize settings

Background
Customize the RSI system by changing the background image of the main menu screen on each monitor. Select a source to load the image from. Options include USB, SD card, or Local (internal memory).

Select a source then navigate the content

and select the new background image.

Choose the desired image and display the

confirmation dialog box. Select Yes to con-

firm. Press

to view the new back-

ground image.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

LHA4919
Bluetooth® streaming
To access "BLUETOOTH" from the home screen use the directional pad on the remote and navigate to "SETTINGS" then "BLUETOOTH". Status button indicates if the Bluetooth® is enabled when green or disabled when red. Highlight and press to enable or disable Bluetooth®.
Once enabled, the RSI will automatically search for available devices in pairing mode. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "Device name" then "Connect" to pair. Input the PIN from connecting device (if prompted). Device name will display

"Connected" once paired properly. Select "OK" to confirm changes and close the window. To unpair a Bluetooth® device, select Device name then Unpair.
If the device is not listed, select Refresh Symbol and the device will appear in Available device list. If device does not appear, double check that the device is in pairing mode (refer to the device's manual for instructions).
Bluetooth® equipped vehicles can stream audio from the display through vehicle's sound system once paired. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

LHA4920

Lip-Sync adjustment

Lip-Sync adjustments can be accessed by

pressing

on the remote, then select-

ing "BLUETOOTH". Highlight the numerical

value and press

. Use the directional

pad to synchronize video and audio play-

back due to small delay inherent in some

Bluetooth® devices. Press

to set value.

Highlight save and press

to exit.

To select which Monitor will stream Bluetooth®, using the directional pad on the remote select "SETTINGS: then "AUDIO" then "BLUETOOTH" from the home screen. Highlight "MONITOR A" or "MONITOR B" and

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

press

. Selecting Monitor A or B to

stream Bluetooth® can also be achieved by

pressing

while video is playing.

Press

then "BLUETOOTH", then "SE-

LECT". Highlight "MONITOR A", "OFF", or

"MONITOR B". Highlight "SAVE" and press

to set configuration and close the win-

dow.

LHA4921
About parental lock
Some DVDs may have a parental rating level assigned to the entire disc or to certain scenes/chapters on the disc. Parental Lock allows the playback limitation level to be set. This prohibits the playing discs that are not suitable for children or have alternative scenes. The rating levels range from 1 to 8. They are country dependent, but in general they are defined as follows:
1 KID SAFE: Kids material; recommended children and viewers of all ages.

2 G: General Audience; recommended for all ages.
3 PG: Parental Guidance suggested.
4 PG-13: Unsuitable for children under age 13.
5/6 PGR/R: Parental Guidance/Restricted content not suitable for children under the age of 17.
7 NC-17: No children under age 17.
8 Adult: Mature content; should be viewed only by an adult due to graphic sexual material, violence, or language.
Once a rating level is set, DVDs that are rated above that level will not play unless a 4-digit password is entered and higherlevel rating is chosen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

LHA4922

Changing parental lock

To set the parental lock using the direc-

tional pad on the remote, select "SETTINGS"

then `PARENTAL" from the home screen.

Choose password with directional pad and

press

to enter, press

again to

confirm your password. Once the pass-

word is selected, the parental rating menu

will appear to select highest playable DVD

rating from 1 8.

For example, to set the ratings limit for PG

and below, select "RATINGS" then "3" using

the directional pad and press

, based

on the rating levels. For additional informa-

tion, see "About parental lock" (P. 4-79).

To change password, select "SETTINGS"

then "PARENTAL" from the home screen.

Enter the current password, select "PASS-

WORD" then "MODIFY" to set new password,

press

once to enter, and select again

to confirm. To exit "PARENTAL" menu press

To remove the parental lock password, se-

lect "SETTINGS" then "PARENTAL" from the

home screen. Enter the current password.

Select "PASSWORD" then "REMOVE", press

to enter, and select again to confirm.

To exit Parental menu press

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom
Monitor does not power on
Monitor front panel controls flash red System frozen - will not respond
Disc will not play
Disc plays, but stops intermittently
No picture Distorted picture Cannot advance through a DVD movie

Remedy Verify the vehicle is in the ON or ACC position. Verify the battery is installed correctly in the remote control. Verify the in-line fuse protection is good. Refer to the RSI system installation instructions for vehicle-specific fuse location.
For further diagnosis, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Soft reset the system by pressing and holding the power button on the top of the driver side monitor for 5 seconds. Hard reset the system by turning the ignition off, then back on. Insert the disc with label side facing the rear of the vehicle. Check if the disc is defective by trying another disc. Check the type of disc being played. This unit only plays DVD (Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD, CD-R, and CD-RW. The unit and the disc are coded by region. If the region codes don't match, the DVD can't be played. The disc may be dirty and need cleaning. Condensation may have formed inside the unit. Remove the disc and allow unit to dry out. The disc may be scratched too badly to play. Check that the signal source is connected. Check the menu source setting. Match your monitor mode with the source correctly. Check the disc for fingerprints and clean with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. You cannot advance through the opening credits and warning information that appears at the beginning of DVDs because the disc is programmed to prohibit these actions. Some discs may not allow this function. Try another disc.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Symptom

Remedy

Make sure that the external media device is connected properly, and all cables are securely inserted into the appropriate jacks.

Verify that the batteries in the headphones are fresh.

If you are using the wireless headphones, make sure you turn on the power and select the correct monitor (A or B). No sound or distorted sound Verify the volume is turned up on headphones and the system.

Verify nothing is blocking the path between the monitor IR sensor and headphones.

When placing the headphones on your head, make sure to observe the Left and Right orientation. The headphones must be oriented correctly (facing forward) to receive the audio signal.

Monitor feels warm

When the monitor is in use for a long period of time, the surface will be warm. This is normal.

Player does not respond to all commands during playback

The DVD may not permit some commands. Refer to the specific instructions included with the DVD for more information.

A Parental Setting message is displayed, prohibiting movie playback

Enter the 4-digit Parental Password using the remote and then press lock" (P. 4-80).

. For additional information, see "Changing parental

Cannot connect mobile device to the internal RSI Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device. Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode. Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74).

Cannot connect RSI system Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, see to an external Wi-Fi network "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74).

Cannot establish a Bluetooth® connection

Check to make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on the RSI system. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming" (P. 4-78).

Check to make sure mobile device supports Miracast®. Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Miracast® certified devices.

Cannot establish a Miracast® connection to the RSI system

Check to make sure Miracast® is enabled on the mobile device.

Select Miracast® source from the RSI main menu.

Audio/video files embedded with DRM are not compatible.

Cannot play certain files from USB or SD cards

Some USB storage devices and SD cards may not be compatible. Replace the external storage device (USB, SD).

Due to ongoing technological advancements, some USB flash drives and SD cards may be incompatible with this system.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom

Remedy

Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74).

Cannot connect to external Check network upload speed from your home (or wherever the Singbox® is located).

Singbox®

Confirm hotspot or Wi-Fi download speed/connection quality.

Check that your Singbox® is properly set up.

Cannot share content from a A compatible UPnP app is required to be installed on the mobile device.

mobile device to the RSI sys-

tem

Audio/video files embedded with DRM cannot be streamed to the RSI system.

Cannot share content between mobile devices using the internal Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device. Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P. 4-74).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

SPECIFICATIONS

LCD Backlight Type Display Type
Supported Disc Types Frequency Response
HDMI Support MHL Support Wireless Audio
Wi-Fi Network
Wi-Fi Modulation Bluetooth® Support
Bluetooth® BR/EDR
Bluetooth® LE
USB Support SD Card Support

LED 8.0 inch (Diagonal) a-Si TFT Active Matrix, 1024x3(RGB) x 600 resolution DVD (Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD, CD-R, CD-RW
3.5mm Audio Output: 200Hz ~ 16kHz +/- 6dB Version 1.4b, HDCP 2.1 Compliant
Version 2.0, 900mA Maximum Charging Output 2-Channel Stereo Headphone Operation, (Typical Infrared Reception/Range: 0.9m; 80°, 1.8m; 50°) 802.11b/g/n, TX/RX Frequency: 2412 MHz - 2484 MHz, Antenna 1: 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n HT20, 802.11n HT40, MIMO Antenna 1+2:
802.11n HT20 802.11b: DSSS (DBPSK / DQPSK / CCK), 802.11g/n: OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM)
Version 4.1 TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 79, Bluetooth BR (1Mbps): GFSK Modulation, Bluetooth EDR (2Mbps): /4-DQPSK
Modulation, Bluetooth EDR (3Mbps): 8-DPSK Modulation TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 40, Carrier Frequency of Each Channel:, (37 hopping + 3 Advertising channel),
Type of Modulation: Bluetooth LE: GFSK Version 1.1, Version 2.0 High Speed, 10 watt (2 Amp) Maximum Charging Output
SD, SDHC, SDXC

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
FCC Notice
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The Bluetooth® antenna cannot be removed (or replaced) by user.
Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
· Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
· Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
· Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
· Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help.

LHA4926
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Voxx Automotive Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
DVD Video Playback
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Several applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions differ depending on the application which is used to encode.
FLAC
Copyright © 2000-2009 Josh Coalson Copyright © 2011-2013 Xiph.Org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
MP3

works or in other electronic content distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
WMA/WMV
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
SD/SDHC/SDXC
SD, SDHC and SDXC Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD-3C LLC in the United States, other countries or both.

Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenuegenerating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net-

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4923
HDMI
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL
MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile HighDefinition Link are trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL, LLC in the United States and other countries.

All other trademarks and their respective logos cited herein are the property of their respective owners.

LHA4924
Dolby Digital
This product will down-mix Dolby Digital signals internally and the sound will be output in stereo. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
European Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Notice
In accordance with Directive 2012/19/EU of the European Parliament on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE):

LHA4925
The symbol above indicates that separate collection of electrical and electronic equipment is required. When this product has reached the end of its serviceable life, it cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. It must be collected and treated separately. It has been determined by the European Parliament that there are potential negative effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. It is the users` responsibility to utilize the available collection system to ensure WEEE is properly treated.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

iPod®/IPHONE®

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.
WARNING
· A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
· If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
· Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
· Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
· Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
· Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
· For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

"Made for iPod", "Made for iPhone" and "Made for iPad" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod Nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-14 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-17
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Automatic transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-24 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-29 LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-34 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Intelligent Cruise Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-51 How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-53 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . .5-89 I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92 I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101 Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105 Using 4Wheel Drive (4WD) (if so equipped) . . . . 5-105 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . 5-106 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112 Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . .5-117 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-118

Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . 5-121
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . 5-122 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123 How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-128

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
· Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

· If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

· Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

· Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

· Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the

air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial

to high to circulate the air.

· If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the liftgate or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

· The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If the vehicle engine experiences excessive fuel consumption or produces excessive smoke it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.
THREE-WAY CATALYST (if so equipped)
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING
· The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
· Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
· Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
· Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
· Do not race the engine while warming it up.
· Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
Starting and driving 5-5

prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Additional information:
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
· The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
· The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After your tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

· The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.
· The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
· Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
· The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 6-3).

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3) for changing a flat tire.)

5-6 Starting and driving

· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
· Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
· If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
· If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
· If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
· If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
· If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
WARNING
After rotating the tires, do not use the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tire pressure. Instead use a gauge to adjust the tires to the correct pressure in accordance with Tire and Loading Information label.

Starting and driving 5-7

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire. · If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When

the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
· If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
· The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions: If there is interference from an external device or transmitter. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire. There is a malfunction in the TPMS. There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators. The identification code of the tire pressure sensor is not registered to the system. The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
· If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel Drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, see "Driving safety precautions" (P. 5-10).

5-8 Starting and driving

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in "Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" (P. 1-2), and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
· If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35). If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide.

Starting and driving 5-9

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. · The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire. · Do not rapidly apply the brakes. · Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal. · Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, see "Changing a flat tire" (P. 6-3).
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-Wheel Drive models are less capable than 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

5-10 Starting and driving

Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
· Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.
· Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.
· Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.
· Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
· Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a dropoff or other hazard that could cause an accident.

· If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.
· Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed.
· Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.
· Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over.
· Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving offroad. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.

· Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.
· Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
· Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with 4WD engaged.
· For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Starting and driving 5-11

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

· Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
· Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.
· If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN 4WD vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident.

· Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.
· Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For additional information, see "Wet brakes" (P. 5-116).
· Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.
· Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional information, see "Maintenance schedules" (P. 9-7).

LSD2014
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

5-12 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will illuminate as follows:
Push center: · Once to change to ACC. · Two times to change to ON. · Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the meter. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-31).

LSD2456
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.

Starting and driving 5-13

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle O1 .
· The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.
· If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
· If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
5-14 Starting and driving

The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories, such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position after a period of time under the following conditions: · All doors are closed. · The shift lever is in P (Park). · The hazard lamps are off. · The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur: · Any door is opened. · The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position. · The ignition switch changes position. · The hazard lamps are turned on.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions: · All doors are closed. · The shift lever is in P (Park). · The hazard lamps are off. · The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur: · Any door is opened. · The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position. · The ignition switch changes position. · The hazard lamps are turned on. · The turn signals are turned on.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
· Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
· Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

SSD0860
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:
· When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
· If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-27).

Starting and driving 5-15

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

· Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
· Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
· Check that all windows and lights are clean.
· Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
· Check that all doors are closed.
· Position seat and adjust head restraints/ headrests.
· Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
· Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
· Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The starter is designed not to operate unless the shift lever is in either P (Park) or N (Neutral).
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
· If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
· If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to the LOCK position. After

5-16 Starting and driving

cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
In preparation for the next engine start, the engine may have a slightly delayed shutoff after placing the ignition switch in the OFF position, depending on the driving conditions.
NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).

Starting and driving 5-17

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE
The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer). When the engine temperature reaches a certain level:
· The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position.
· Engine power may be reduced.
· The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned off for a short time (the blower will continue to operate).
Engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed. The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also shift manually.
As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal, and the air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back on.
5-18 Starting and driving

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may also come on if the engine coolant temperature is not reduced or the air conditioning cooling function does not turn back on. If only it remains on, you do not need to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected soon. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-20).
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-12).

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)
WARNING
· Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
· Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
· Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

· Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
The A/T in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle
WARNING
· Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
· Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
· Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
· Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-19

LSD3703
Shifting
To move the shift lever:
: Shift while depressing the brake pedal
: Shift without depressing the brake pedal
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the ignition switch can be placed in the LOCK position.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
The P (Park) position is automatically engaged if you switch off the ignition.
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

5-20 Starting and driving

D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

LSD2457
Manual shift mode
When the manual shift mode switch is pushed while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. After pushing the manual shift mode switch, the position indicator varies depending on the gear position and vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 D
M9 (Ninth)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9
M9 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M8 (Eighth)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
M8 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M7 (Seventh)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7
M7 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Starting and driving 5-21

M6 (Sixth)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
M6 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter
M5 (Fifth)
For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
M5 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M4 (Fourth)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 M2 M3 M4
M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

M3 (Third)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 M2 M3
M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M2 (Second)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1 M2
M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
M1 (First)
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.
M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on the meter.

· Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up
Push the shift switch to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)
When shifting down
Push the shift switch to the - (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.) · The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears.) · Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
Press and hold the +(UP) button to return the transmission to the normal driving mode.

5-22 Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE

· In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear immediately because of vehicle speed. The transmission will upshift or downshift when vehicle speed matches the programmed transmission shift points. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
· In the manual shift mode, the transmission will not upshift to a higher gear than is manually selected. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
Accelerator downshift -- in D (Drive) position --
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 3 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
· Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
· Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
· Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

Starting and driving 5-23

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)

vehicle information display, and optionally in the main central area of the display screen.

LSD2176
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

LSD3704
The TSR system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multi-
sensing front camera unit OA located on
the windshield in front of the inside rearview mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition. TSR information is always displayed at the top of the

WARNING
The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to provide the driver with information. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.

5-24 Starting and driving

LSD4012
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system displays the following types of road signs:

LSD3378
OA Speed sign detected (in Canada) OB Speed sign detected (in USA) OC Speed sign detected (no speed limit de-
tected)
OD "Do not pass" sign detected
CAUTION
· The TSR system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road signs.

· The TSR system may not function properly under the following conditions:
When the road sign is not clearly visible, for example, due to damage or weather conditions.
When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the multi-sensing camera unit.
When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
In areas not covered by the navigation system.
If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.
When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.
Starting and driving 5-25

LSD4011

TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the TSR system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select "Traffic Sign" and press the ENTER button to turn the system on or off.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the TSR system may be deactivated automatically. The "Not Available High Camera Temp" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR system will resume operating automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically and the system "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the TSR "Malfunction" message appears, pull of the road at a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the TSR "Malfunction" message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The TSR system uses the same multisensing front camera unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, located in front of the interior rearview mirror. For additional information, see "System maintenance" (P. 5-31).

5-26 Starting and driving

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

LSD3704
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
· This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera
unit OA located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see "LDW system operation" (P. 5-28).

Starting and driving 5-27

lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven
5-28 Starting and driving

LSD3705
at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select "Lane" and press the ENTER button.

3. Select "Warning (LDW)" and press the ENTER button.

4. Push the Warning systems switch to turn the system on or off.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD3732
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
· Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Starting and driving 5-29

When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
When driving on winding or uneven roads.
When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
· The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
5-30 Starting and driving

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
On roads where there are sharp curves.
On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: "Not Available High Camera Temp."
When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically.

The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:
· When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
· When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and "Malfunction" will appear in the vehicle information display. If " Malfunction" appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If "Malfunction" continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3707
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit O1 for the LDW sys-
tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

· Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-31

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
· Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

LSD2619
The BSW system uses radar sensors O1
installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-32 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

LSD3933

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and the BSW/RCTA indicator illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, see "BSW driving situations" (P. 5-36).

Starting and driving 5-33

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM 5-34 Starting and driving

warning systems switch. For additional information, see "Warning systems switch" (P. 2-57).

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance" and press ENTER.

2. Select "Blind Spot" and press ENTER.

3. Select "Warning (BSW)" and press ENTER.

4. Push the Warning systems switch to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:
· When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
· When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

LSD3733
When the BSW system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be turned off temporarily by pushing the

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
· The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
Oncoming vehicles.
Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.

A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
· The radar sensor's detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
· The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
· The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle

· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
· Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-35

Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2299
Illustration 1 Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing
5-36 Starting and driving

LSD2300
Illustration 2 Approaching from behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
· The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

· The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302
Illustration 3 Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

LSD2303
Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
· When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

Starting and driving 5-37

· The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305
Illustration 5 Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

LSD2308
Illustration 6 Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-38 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD3710
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear and the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in
the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Starting and driving 5-39

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2619
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

5-40 Starting and driving

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

For Canada
Model: SRR3B
Canada 310
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

Droit applicable: Canada 310
L'émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
2. L'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Informations sur l'exposition aux rayonnements radiofréquences:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements définies pour un environnement non être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm decontrôlé. Cet équipement doit distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.
· The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.
· Do not use the RCTA system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

Starting and driving 5-41

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from the side, the system chimes a sound (single beep) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light on the side of the vehicle is approaching from flashes.

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
5-42 Starting and driving

LSD3933
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

LSD2216
The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors O1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.

LSD2619
Starting and driving 5-43

For additional information, see "Parking Aids system switch" (P. 2-61).

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance" and press ENTER.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press ENTER.

3. Select "CTA" and press the ENTER button to turn system on or off.

4. Push the Parking Aids system switch to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM 5-44 Starting and driving

LSD3734
When the RCTA system is enabled in the vehicle information display, the system can be turned off temporarily by pushing the Front and rear sonar system OFF switch.

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD3195
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

· Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)
A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
· The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
Illustration OA : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
Illustration OB : When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
Illustration OC : When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
Illustration OD : When an ap-
proaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
Starting and driving 5-45

Illustration OE : When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
· The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
· Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

NOTE:

Illustration 1

LSD2043

In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 2

LSD2044

5-46 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD3710
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear and the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in
the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/ RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Starting and driving 5-47

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-48 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

LSD2464

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

· If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. The

(green)

indicator illuminates in the vehicle infor-

mation display then blinks to warn the

driver.

Starting and driving 5-49

· If the

(green) indicator blinks, push

the ON/OFF switch off and have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· The

(green) indicator may blink

when the ON/OFF switch is pushed ON

while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/

SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the

cruise control system, use the following

procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: · When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed. · In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed. · On winding or hilly roads. · On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.). · In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

5-50 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch on. The

(white) indica-

tor in the vehicle information display will

illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The
(green) indicator in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

· To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
· The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:

· Push the CANCEL switch; the

indica-

tor in the vehicle information display

goes out.

· Tap the brake pedal; the goes out.

indicator

· Push the ON/OFF switch off. The indicator in the vehicle information display goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the

indicator in the vehicle

information display goes out if:

· You depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

· The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

· You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
· Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.
· Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
· Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
· Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.
· Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.
· Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

OA ON/OFF switch

LSD3758
Starting and driving 5-51

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death.
· The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
· Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
· Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

· In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:
· Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed
· Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed
Always confirm the setting in the ON/OFF switch display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see "Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode" (P. 5-53).
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-70).

5-52 Starting and driving

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, quickly push and release the ON/OFF
switch OA .

LSD3759
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ON/OFF switch
OA for longer than approximately 1.5 sec-
onds. For additional information, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-70).

LSD3712
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

Starting and driving 5-53

If the radar sensor O1 detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

5-54 Starting and driving

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE OPERATION

LSD3760
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a

slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle's total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.
For additional information, see "Approach warning" (P. 5-61).

The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
· When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
· When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.
· When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-55

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

LSD3713
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the ON/OFF switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
2. ACCEL/RES switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

3. COAST/SET switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.
4. ON/OFF switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
5. DISTANCE switch: switch:
Changes the vehicle's following distance: · Long · Middle · Short

5-56 Starting and driving

LSD3297
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color:
· ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ON/OFF switch is on.
· ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

· ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.
4. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

LSD3761
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
and release the ON/OFF switch OA . The ICC
system ON indicator (gray), set distance in-
dicator and set vehicle speed indicator OB
come on in a standby state for setting.

Starting and driving 5-57

LSD3762
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch OC and release it. The
ICC system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance in-
dicator and set vehicle speed indicator OB
will come on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
5-58 Starting and driving

LSD3102
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:
· When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode
· When the parking brake is applied
· When the brakes are operated by the driver
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up:
· When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ON/OFF switch by pushing the ON/OFF switch again.)
For additional information about the VDC system, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-118).
· When VDC is operating
· When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping.)

LSD3301
1 System set display with vehicle ahead
2 System set display without vehicle
ahead
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.
NOTE:
· The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.
· When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.

Starting and driving 5-59

LSD3267
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator OA will flash when the ve-
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:
· Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
· Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
· Turn the ON/OFF switch off. The ICC indicators will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
· Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.
· Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
· Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
· Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.
· Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
· Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

5-60 Starting and driving

LSD3714

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.

Each time the distance

switch OA is

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again,

in that sequence.

LSD2752

Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long

200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short

90 (30)

· The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

· The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is restarted.

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
· The chime sounds.
· The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
· When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.
· When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
· When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
· The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
· The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

Starting and driving 5-61

NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).
Acceleration when passing
When the ICC system is engaged above 37 mph and following a slower vehicle (below ICC set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the left, the ICC system will automatically start to accelerate the vehicle to help initiate passing on the left and will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal operates this feature. As the driver steers
5-62 Starting and driving

the vehicle and moves into the passing lane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system will continue to accelerate to the ICC system set speed. If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the vehicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the left lane to pass, the acceleration will stop after a short time and regain the set following distance. Acceleration can be stopped at any point by depressing the brake pedal or the CANCEL switch on the steering wheel.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of a collision that may result in serious injury or death, please be aware of the following:
· This function is only activated with the left turn signal and will briefly accelerate the vehicle even if a lane change is not initiated. This can include non-passing situations such as left side exits.

· Ensure that when passing another vehicle, the adjacent lane is clear before initiating the pass. Sudden changes in traffic may occur while passing -- always manually steer or brake as needed -- never solely rely on the system.
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:
· When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
· When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position, Manual mode or L (Low) range.
· When the parking brake system is applied
· When the VDC system is turned off
· When VDC operates
· When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor
· When a wheel slips
· When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.
· The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

· As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
· If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
· Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

· The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:
On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)
On repeated uphill and downhill roads
When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
Interference by other radar sources

Starting and driving 5-63

· Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
· In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
· Stationary and slow moving vehicles
· Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
· Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
· Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
· When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's detection.
· When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
· When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor's operation within the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

5-64 Starting and driving

SSD0252
Starting and driving 5-65

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

SSD0253
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

5-66 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD3763
The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: · When the VDC system is turned off · When the VDC operates · When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) · When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill · When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive), Manual mode or L (Low) range. · When the parking brake is applied · When a wheel slips · When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Starting and driving 5-67

Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When driving on roads with limited road structures (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" message.
Action to take
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.

LSD3987
Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on.

5-68 Starting and driving

LSD3304
Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3712
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the ICC system O1 is located
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor area clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

· Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
FCC Notice
USA
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules with Industry Canada Licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
Starting and driving 5-69

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CANADA
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
5-70 Starting and driving

L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utillisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utillisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
· In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected.
· Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
· Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
· Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:
When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed

On winding or hilly roads
On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
In very windy areas
· Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

LSD3715
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches
1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. ACCEL/RES switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. COAST/SET switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally
4. ON/OFF switch: Master switch to activate the system

LSD3106
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information display.
1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color. · Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ON/OFF switch is on · Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set
Starting and driving 5-71

· Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

Pushing the ON/OFF switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ON/OFF switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

LSD3764
Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the
ON/OFF switch OA for longer than about
1.5 seconds.
When pushing ON/OFF switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
display and indicators OB are displayed in
the vehicle information display. After you hold ON/OFF switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed.

CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch off when not using the ICC system.

5-72 Starting and driving

LSD3765
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET OC switch and release it. (The
color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
· To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

· The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ON/OFF switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.
2. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/ RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/ SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-73

System temporarily unavailable 5-74 Starting and driving

LSD3766
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:

· When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode
· When the parking brake is applied
· When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)
· When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
· The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
· There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.

LSD3716
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the parking sensors O1
located on the rear bumper.

NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-122).

Starting and driving 5-75

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
NOTE:
· The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system.
· When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys-
tem indicator
5-76 Starting and driving

LSD3717
2 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
3 Center display

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system on or off.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display

and then press the ENTER button. Use

the

button to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the ENTER button.

3. To set the RAB system to on or off, use the ENTER button to check the box for "Rear."

4. Push the Parking Aids system switch to turn the system on or off.

When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD3736

Starting and driving 5-77

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
· When the vehicle approaches an obstacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary.
· If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal.

· Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:
Moving objects
Low objects
Narrow objects
Wedge-shaped objects
Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
Objects that suddenly appear
Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.
· The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:
Obstacles located high off the ground
Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle
Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave

· The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:
There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors.
A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle.
· The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.
There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.
The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.
There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.
An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle's sonar, is near the vehicle.

5-78 Starting and driving

· Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.
· The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
· In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:
The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.
The vehicle's posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump).
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.
Snow chains are used.
Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.
The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.

The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.
· Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation:
The vehicle is towed.
The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.
The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.
The vehicle is towing an object (if so equipped).
Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)
· Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, and the RAB system warning light will illuminate and the warning message "System fault See Owner's Manual" in the vehicle information display. Action to take If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.
Starting and driving 5-79

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

LSD3716
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:
· Always keep the parking sensors O1
clean.
· If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

· Do not subject the area around the park-
ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do
not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on
the parking sensors O1 and their sur-
rounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane.

5-80 Starting and driving

LSD3719
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of
the vehicle OB to measure the distance to
the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera installed be-
hind the windshield OA in addition to the
radar sensor.

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD3726
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer-
gency warning indicator
Starting and driving 5-81

3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 37 mph (10 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically.

While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
· When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.
· When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
· When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

5-82 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

LSD3718

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the ENTER button.

3. Select "Front" and press the ENTER button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
· The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

Starting and driving 5-83

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects:
Small pedestrians (including small children), animals and cyclists.
Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards.

Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position.
Oncoming vehicles
Crossing vehicles
Obstacles on the roadside
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
For pedestrian detection, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.

· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
· The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the speed difference between the two vehicles is too small.
· The radar sensor AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)
Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road.
If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area.
Interference by other radar sources.
The camera area of the windshield is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
When you are towing a trailer etc.

5-84 Starting and driving

Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera. Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.
A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)
The poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.
The pedestrian's profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable due to the pedestrian transporting luggage, wearing bulky or very loosefitting clothing or accessories.
· The system performance may degrade in the following conditions:
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
The vehicle is driven on a slope.
Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle.

· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect blockage of sensor areas covered by ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
· In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-85

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE 5-86 Starting and driving

LSD3727

Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: · The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source. · The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen. · Strong light is shining from the front. · The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. · The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Condition B:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "For-

ward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE: If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message "System fault See Owner's Manual" will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3719
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle OB . The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield OA .
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper and windshield clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

Starting and driving 5-87

· Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.
· Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
FCC Notice
USA
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules with Industry Canada Licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
5-88 Starting and driving

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CANADA
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utillisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utillisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The I-FCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD3712
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor O1
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-89

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
5-90 Starting and driving

LSD3728

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

LSD2263
Starting and driving 5-91

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF 5-92 Starting and driving

LSD3718

Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the ENTER button.

3. Select "Front" and press the ENTER button to turn the system on or off.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:
· The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
· The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

LSD2312
Illustration A
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-93

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The I-FCW system cannot detect all
vehicles under all conditions. · The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
5-94 Starting and driving

Illustration B
Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway
Oncoming vehicles Crossing vehicles · (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.
· The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
Snow or heavy rain When you are towing a trailer etc.

LSD2265
Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
Interference by other radar sources.
Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.
Driving in a tunnel (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed. (Illustration C) When the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.

(Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-95

Illustration C
5-96 Starting and driving

LSD2266

Illustration D

LSD2313

Starting and driving 5-97

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE 5-98 Starting and driving

LSD3727

Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled

Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Radar Blocked See Owner's Manual" message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE:
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3712
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor O1 is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
· Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-99

· Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
USA
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules with Industry Canada Licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utillisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utillisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

5-100 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-DA system could result in serious injury or death.
· The IDA system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
· The IDA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver's lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.
· It is the driver's responsibility to: stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, be in control of the vehicle at all times, avoid driving when tired, avoid distractions (texting, etc).

The IDA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.
LSD3735
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION
If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message "Take a break?" appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip. The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.
Starting and driving 5-101

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM
5-102 Starting and driving

LSD3729

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the IDA system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select "Driver Attention" and press the ENTER button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the IDA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The I-DA system may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions:
Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or pot holes.
Strong side wind.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

If you have adopted a sporty driving style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.
Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.
· The IDA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions:
Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph (60 km/h).
Short lapses of attention.
Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.

LIC3125
System malfunction
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
· Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
· Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
· Avoid quick starts.
· Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
· Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

Starting and driving 5-103

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application · Avoid rapid starts and stops. · Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible. · Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed · Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops. · Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops. · Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds · Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load. · Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.
5-104 Starting and driving

· Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
· Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
· Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
· Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
· Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
· Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.
· Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
· Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling
· Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 3060 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
· Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
· Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.
· Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
· Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
· Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible.
· When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

USING 4WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if so equipped)

· Keep your engine tuned up.

· Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.

· Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

· Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

· For vehicles equipped with

, use 4H

or 4L position only when necessary.

4-Wheel Drive operation lowers fuel

economy.

· Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" (P. 10-7).

WARNING
· For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
· Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

CAUTION
· Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption. If the 4WD vehicle information display warning message turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
In the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
In the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed, and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
· If the vehicle information display warning message is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-105

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURES
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select

the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD shift switch position
2WD

Wheels driven
Rear wheels

4WD shift

Indicator Transfer 4LO position

Use conditions
For driving on dry, paved roads (Economy drive)

4H Four wheels
4LO N (Neutral)
Four wheels

*1 May blink
Illuminated

For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered roads
N (Neutral) disengages the automatic transmission (A/T) mechanical parking lock, which will allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leave the transfer shift position in N (Neutral).*2
For use when maximum power and traction is required (for example, on steep grades or rocky, sandy, muddy roads)

4WD shift procedure
Move the 4WD switch. 2WD <--> 4H The 4WD shift indicator will indicate that the transfer shift position is engaged. IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT LEVER TO THE N (NEUTRAL) POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.
1. Stop the vehicle. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, depress and
turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H. THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL). *3

5-106 Starting and driving

*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the 4LO indicator stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the N (Neutral) position. - If the 4WD vehicle information display warning message illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to the correct operating condition. 1. Turn off the engine by placing the ignition switch in the OFF position. 2. Start the engine. - Check that the 4WD vehicle information display warning message turns off. If the warning message in the vehicle information display stays on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. 3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. 4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to the desired mode. - Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle's engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the 4WD shift and 4LO position indicators to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicators will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-118).
Starting and driving 5-107

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions. There are three types of drive modes available: 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to move between each mode: 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle MUST be stationary, move the shift lever to N (Neutral), and depress the brake pedal. The switch must be pushed and turned to select 4LO.
WARNING
· When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator is on and the Automatic Transmission Park (ATP) warning light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the A/T is in the P (Park) position.

· The 4LO indicator must stop blinking and remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other gear when the 4LO indicator is blinking, the vehicle may move unexpectedly.
CAUTION
· Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
· The 4H position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage drivetrain components. Speeds over 62 mph (100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.
· The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 mph (50 km/h).
· When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.

5-108 Starting and driving

· Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low A/T gears (M1 or M2) for engine braking.
· Do not operate the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) with the rear wheels spinning.
· Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear. NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD position under these conditions.
· The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads, · Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. · Drive carefully according to the road sur-
face conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck, · Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. · Place stones or wooden blocks under the
tires to free the vehicle. · Use the Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). For additional information, see "Electronic locking rear differential (E-lock) system" (P. 5-112). · If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the vehicle back and forth between reverse and drive gears. · If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place stones or wooden blocks under the tires. Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire chains may be effective.
CAUTION
· Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will sink deep into the mud, making it difficult to free the vehicle.
· Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction.

LSD2463
4WD shift switch operations
· Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on driving conditions.
· If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn, accelerating or decelerating or if the key switch is turned off while in the 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.
· You may hear some noise as the system shifts or engages. This is not abnormal.

CAUTION
· When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.
· Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (M1 or M2) for engine braking.
· Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning.
· Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 mph (100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system.
· Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.

Starting and driving 5-109

LSD2328
4WD shift indicator
The 4WD shift indicator is located in the vehicle information display.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch. · The 4WD shift indicator may come on
while shifting from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD shift indicator will stay on.
· If the 4WD vehicle information display warning message comes on, the 4WD indicator goes out.
5-110 Starting and driving

CAUTION
· If the 4WD shift indicator indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD vehicle information display warning message comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Warning message
Warning message Vehicle information display

Warning message comes on when: There is a malfunction in the 4Wheel Drive system

4WD Error: See Owner's Manual FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner's Manual

The difference in wheel rotation is large

CAUTION
· If the warning message comes on during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning message turns on.
· When the warning message comes on, the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.
· Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption. If the 4WD warning message turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
In the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
Starting and driving 5-111

In the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the automatic transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed, and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
· If the warning message is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning message on.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The E-Lock system can provide additional traction and should only be used when a vehicle has become or is becoming stuck. This system operates by electronically "locking" the two rear drive wheels together, allowing them to turn at the same speed. The system is used when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using the 4LO position (4-Wheel Drive vehicles).
When added traction is required, activate the E-Lock system by pushing the switch on. For additional information, see "Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch" (P. 2-59). Once the system fully engages, the indicator light in the instrument panel will remain on. When the system is activated, both rear wheels will engage, providing added traction.
The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to engage the system, and the system will only engage up to approximately 4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the system should be turned off and driving resumed.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is disabled and the ABS warning light illuminates when the E-Lock system is on.

WARNING
· Never leave the E-Lock system on when driving on paved or hardsurfaced roads. Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury. After using the E-Lock system to free the vehicle, turn the system off.
· Use the E-Lock system only in an emergency when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using 4LO. Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice surface. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury.
· Observe the above warnings. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control may result. This may result in an accident and serious personal injury.

5-112 Starting and driving

ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)

CAUTION
· After using the E-Lock system, or during normal driving, turn the switch off to prevent possible damage to the drivetrain components from extended use.
· Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock system is in operation. Otherwise, the drivetrain components could be damaged.
· When the E-Lock system is in operation, turning the vehicle becomes difficult. This can be dangerous, especially at high speeds. Doing so could damage the drivetrain components.
· Do not operate the E-Lock system when the vehicle is turning or when one side wheel is rotating. Otherwise, the drivetrain components could be damaged.
· The E-Lock system operates only when the engine is running.
· In 4H mode, the E-Lock system does not operate when the E-Lock system switch is turned to the ON position. (The E-Lock system indicator light will flash.)
· Observe the above cautions. Otherwise, loss of normal steering control may result.

2 The average fuel economy since the
last reset will be displayed.
3 The best fuel economy of the past his-
tory will be displayed.
The ECO Drive Report can be set to be ON or OFF.

LSD2472
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the ECO management display appears.
1 Previous 5 times (History)
2 Current fuel economy
3 Best fuel economy
The result of ECO evaluation is displayed 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the vehicle is driven at least 1/3 miles (500 meters).
1 The average fuel economy for the pre-
vious 5 times will be displayed.

Starting and driving 5-113

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
· Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

WSD0050
· Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

· Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.
· Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

5-114 Starting and driving

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
· HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB OA :
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
· HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB OB :
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
· HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB OC :
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
· While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Starting and driving 5-115

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
· The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
· Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-37).

For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35)
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

5-116 Starting and driving

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS) SYSTEM

Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

· The ABLS system uses automatic braking to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to the wheel on the same axle with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping wheel, which helps redirect power to the other wheel.
· On 4Wheel Drive (4WD) models the ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode is engaged, the ABLS system operates for both drive axles. On 2Wheel Drive vehicles, the ABLS system operates on the drive axle only.
· The ABLS system is always on. In some conditions, the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off. If the system is automatically turned off, normal brake function will continue. ABLS will function even when the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is turned off.
· The ABLS system does not operate if both wheels on a drive axle are slipping.
Starting and driving 5-117

WARNING
· The ABLS system helps provide increased traction, but will not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully.
· Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the slip indicator light may illuminate.
· If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate.
5-118 Starting and driving

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

· If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
· Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

· Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).

· If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO

the

indicator light will come on and

the VDC system will be turned off. For

additional information, see "Using

4-Wheel Drive (4WD)" (P. 5-105).

· Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:
· The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
· You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
· Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

For additional information, see "Slip indicator light" (P. 2-21) and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light" (P. 2-21).

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light will come on in the in-
strument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator light is on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The

indicator light illumi-

nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The

indicator light flashes if this

occurs. All other VDC functions are off and

the

indicator light will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to ON when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING
· The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

· Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or the

indicator light may

illuminate.

· If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and

the

indicator light may

illuminate.

· If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the

indi-

cator light may illuminate.

· When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or the

indicator

light may illuminate. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

Starting and driving 5-119

· When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or the

indicator light may

illuminate. This is not a malfunction.

Restart the engine after driving onto

a stable surface.

· If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or the

indicator

light may illuminate.

· The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

· The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driv-

ing and cornering on slippery sur-

faces and always drive carefully.

· Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or the

indicator light may

illuminate.

· If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the

indicator light may illuminate.

· If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the

indi-

cator light may illuminate.

· When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the light may flash or the

indicator indicator

light may illuminate. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

· When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or the

indicator light may

illuminate. This is not a malfunction.

Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

· If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or the

indicator

light may illuminate.

· The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

5-120 Starting and driving

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully and attentively when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
· The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill descent control system can only be activated when the 4H or 4LO position is engaged.
The hill descent control system helps maintain vehicle speed when driving under 15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill descent control is useful when engine braking alone cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing the driver to concentrate on steering while reducing the burden of brake and accelerator operation.
If the hill descent control system ON indicator light is blinking, the hill descent control is engaged; however, the hill descent control will not control the vehicle speed.
· Once the system is activated, the indicator light will remain on in the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Hill descent control system ON indicator light" (P. 2-18).
· You may hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This indicates that the hill descent control system is working properly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
For the best results, when descending steep downhill grades, the hill descent control switch should be ON and the shift lever in M1 (First) for engine braking. For additional information, see "Hill descent control switch" (P. 2-58).

Starting and driving 5-121

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
· The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
· The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied. This helps prevents the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions:
· The shift lever is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.
· The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop operating completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the shift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a flat and level road. When the
indicator light illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system will not operate.

LSD3731
The front and rear sonar system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.
When the "DISPLAY" key is ON, the sonar view will automatically appear in the meter.
WARNING
· The front and rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.

5-122 Starting and driving

· The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
· Read and understand the limitations of the front and rear sonar system as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the front/rear view indicate different distances to the object.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
· This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
· The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

· The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
· Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
· Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of front obstacles when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and both front and rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor

RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

o Display/Beep when detect

Display on camera view

x No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-123

When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

LSD2466
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indi-
cator OA appears.

LSD2467
The system indicators OA will appear when
the vehicle moves closer to an object.

5-124 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM

LSD3730
The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system using the Vehicle Information Display:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press ENTER.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press ENTER.

3. Select "Sensor" and press ENTER to turn the sonar system on, off, or front only.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system using the Parking Aids system switch:

1. Push the "Parking Aids system switch" (the orange light will go out) to turn the system off.

2. To turn the system back on, push the switch (the orange light will illuminate) and the system will be enabled. For additional information, see "Parking Aids system switch" (P. 2-61) and "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-22).

NOTE:

The system will automatically be turned on when the engine is restarted.

Starting and driving 5-125

SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always turn and look back before backing up. The sonar system is not a substitute for proper procedures.
· Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
· This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.
· The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
5-126 Starting and driving

· The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
· The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.
· The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
· The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
· The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h) and is reactivated at lower speeds.

LSD2471
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors O1 are located on the
front and rear bumpers. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the sonar sensors. It is recommended that you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-6).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see "Battery" (P. 8-16).
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, see "Changing engine coolant" (P. 8-6).

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, see "Tire chains" (P. 8-35).

Starting and driving 5-127

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: · A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. · A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. · A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. · Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
· Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip" under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
· Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

· Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
· Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
· Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
· Do not use the cruise control (if so equipped) on slippery roads.
· Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.
· Engine block heaters should be used when the outside temperature is 0°F (-17°C) or lower.

· Engine block heaters run continuously while plugged into the correct voltage electrical outlet.
WARNING
· Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
· Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.
· Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

5-128 Starting and driving

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 24 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

NOTE: When using the engine block heater (if so equipped) on an Applied Vehicle (engine block heater is plugged in):
· Vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
Or
· If a level surface is not available, the vehicle should be parked with the front of the truck lower than the rear (nose down).
CAUTION
Use of the engine block heater when parked with the front of the vehicle higher than the rear (5 degrees or more) may cause the engine block heater to become damaged and/or inoperative.

Starting and driving 5-129

MEMO
5-130 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

· Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
· If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
· Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).
WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

· If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible, If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service

· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will remain on after one minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
In case of emergency 6-3

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Fold up the right rear bench seat. For additional information, see "Folding the rear bench seat up" (P. 1-9).

WARNING
· Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the shift lever is shifted into P (Park).
· Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
· Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142
A. Tire stoppers
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place tire stoppers, supplied with jack, at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

LCE2374
2. Remove the tire stopper bag OA . 3. Release the straps OB .
4. Collapse the jack to remove it from the storage location. Loosen the jack with your fingers until the jack is free.
5. Remove the jack and tool kit.

WCE0150
6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod. Find the oval-shaped opening above the license plate, slightly to the left of the middle (driver's side). Pass the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch, located directly above the spare tire.
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown.

WCE0151
7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle.
8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.
9. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, guide the retainer chain through the center of the tire and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-5

10. Securely store the flat tire beneath the vehicle, from where the full size spare was removed. To reinstall the wheel, remove the center cap (if so equipped) and insert the retainer chain through the wheel. Be sure the rubber rim cover (if so equipped) is centered on the wheel before lifting. Use the assembled jacking rod to slowly rotate the winch clockwise to raise the wheel to the vehicle.
11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reverse steps 1 through 5.
NOTE:
Inspect the rubber rim cover every six years and replace as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
· Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire.
· Failure to use the rubber rim cover may allow the chain to get stuck in the wheel nut holes when stowed.
6-6 In case of emergency

LCE2367
Removing bolt-on wheel caps (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
The wheel cap O1 is only attached with the
wheel nuts and is separate from the wheel
O2 .

To remove the wheel cap, remove the wheel nuts after the jack is securely supporting the vehicle and the tire clears the ground.
For additional information, see "Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire" (P. 6-6).
Take care not to scratch the wheel cap or wheel surface.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire (all models)
WARNING
· Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
· Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.
· Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
· Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

· Never use blocks on or under the jack.
· Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
· Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
· Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

WCE0152
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

In case of emergency 6-7

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head under the arrow stamped on the side of the frame or rear as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and level ground.
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.

LCE0087
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.

WCE0063
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (O1 ,O2 ,O3 ,O4 ,O5 ,O6 )
until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
(O1 ,O2 ,O3 ,O4 ,O5 ,O6 ). Lower the vehicle
completely.

6-8 In case of emergency

WARNING
· Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
· Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
· Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Non-XD models:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
XD models:
131 ft-lb (177 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mi. (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display (if so equipped) of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the tools and jacking equipment in the vehicle. For additional information, see the "Getting the spare tire and tools (Crew and King Cab® models)" (P. 6-4).

WARNING
· Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
· The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35).

In case of emergency 6-9

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
· If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
· Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
· Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
· Keep battery out of the reach of children.
· The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

· Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
· Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
· Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

6-10 In case of emergency

· Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

LCE2223
3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
4. Ensure the vent caps (if so equipped) are level and tight.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).
CAUTION
· Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (-) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) -- not to the battery.

CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 8. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
connect the negative cable and then the positive cable.
In case of emergency 6-11

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
CAUTION
· Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
· Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged.
· Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING
· Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
· To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
· Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

6-12 In case of emergency

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
· Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
· Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
· If your vehicle has front recovery hooks as original factory equipment, do not remove or modify them. If it was not equipped with front recovery hooks, do not install them. Either action could affect proper operation of the front air bag system resulting in injury or death.

CAUTION
· When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. Use dollies or flatbed if any of the listed systems are not working.
· Always attach safety chains before towing.
For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), see "Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) vehicle" (P. 10-55) or "Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicle" (P. 10-55).
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

In case of emergency 6-13

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models with automatic transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

NOTE:

LCE2141

If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.

CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models equipped with an automatic transmission with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.

6-14 In case of emergency

Two-Wheel Drive models with automatic transmission
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

LCE2311
CAUTION
· Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.
· When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may cause damage to the lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).
NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.
When towing long distances or speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h), remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
There are two options to recover a stuck vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional information regarding these options, please refer to the following sections.

In case of emergency 6-15

Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:
· Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
· Attach recovery devices only to main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hooks (if so equipped).
· Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
· Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
· Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
· Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.
6-16 In case of emergency

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
· Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. · Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.
2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). For additional information, see "Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system" (P. 2-59)
3. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. · Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

· Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
· Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
· Do not spin the tires above 34 mph (55 km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h) if the ELock system (if so equipped) is engaged.
6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can: · After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-
age from acid rain. · After driving on coastal roads. · When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. · When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

CAUTION
· Do not concentrate water spray directly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.
· Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

· Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
· Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
· Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
· Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
· Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
· Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
· Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
· Do not use chrome cleaner on any wheel. Doing so can damage the chrome-like coating on the wheel.
· Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
CAUTION
Do not use chrome cleaner on any wheel. Doing so can damage the chrome-like coating on the wheel.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: · Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing. · Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/ grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

· Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/ grooves.
· Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces (if so equipped) with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (if so equipped). This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION
· Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
· Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
· Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
· Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
· Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.

· Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air fresheners.
POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
The sunshade is made from a tricot material.
CAUTION
To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning: · Do not rub the material with a cloth.
Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread. · Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sunshade. This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface.

· Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.
· Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.

Appearance and care 7-5

LPD2417
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:
· NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.
· Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

· Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, see "Floor mat installation" (P. 7-6).
· Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
· Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
· After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition switch still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

7-6 Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION

LAI2088
Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, see "Seat belt maintenance" (P. 1-24).

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: · The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. · Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Appearance and care 7-7

Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
· Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
· Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
· Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
· Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION
· NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
· Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
· Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park)
· Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
· If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
· It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
· Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
· The automatic engine cooling fan (if so equipped) may come on at any time without warning, even if the
8-2 Do-it-yourself

ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
· If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
· Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
· Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
· Because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
CAUTION
· Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.
· Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
· Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE:
If the battery is dead the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.
This "Do-it-yourself" section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, see "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" (P. 10-60).
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

7. Air cleaner 8. Fuse/Fusible link box 9. Drive belt location 10. Radiator cap 11. Battery 12. Engine coolant reservoir

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) (non-XD model)
1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 2. Fuse box

LDI3292
3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Power steering fluid reservoir 5. Engine oil filler cap 6. Brake fluid reservoir

Do-it-yourself 8-3

7. Air cleaner 8. Fuse/Fusible link box 9. Engine coolant reservoir 10. Drive belt location 11. Battery 12. Radiator cap

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) (XD model)
1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 2. Fuse box
8-4 Do-it-yourself

LDI3293
3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Power steering fluid reservoir 5. Engine oil filler cap 6. Brake fluid reservoir

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
· Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-12).
· The radiator and coolant reservoir are equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, it is recommended that you use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION
· Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
· When adding or replacing coolant, it is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

· The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
Do-it-yourself 8-5

For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, see "Engine compartment check locations" (P. 8-3).
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

LDI3295
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) (non-XD model)
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant to the MAX level OA . If the reservoir is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
level OA .
8-6 Do-it-yourself

LDI2823
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) (XD model)
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
· To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
· Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
· Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
· Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

ENGINE OIL

LDI2956
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

LDI0371
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) 5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks OB . This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
level is below the L (Low) mark OA , re-
move the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not
overfill OC .
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
· Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.
· A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

O1 Oil filler cap

LDI3469

O2 Oil drain plug

LDI3426

8-8 Do-it-yourself

O3 Oil filter

LDI3442

LDI3470
O4 Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3536
O5 Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-9

LDI3533
O6 Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)

LDI3534
O7 Skid plate (Type D) (if so equipped)

LDI3005
Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)
Removal of under-engine protectors

8-10 Do-it-yourself

LDI3537
Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2875
Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)

LDI2876
Skid plate (Type D) (if so equipped)
1. Remove bolts OA and skid plate.
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
WARNING
· Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
· Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
· Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage. · The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb (15.0 to 21.0 N·m)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)
9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information about drain and refill capacity, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2). The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Reinstall plate in reverse order of removal.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
· Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
· Check your local regulations.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

When checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
· NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.
· Do not use CVT fluid or manual transmission fluid in this transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
· Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF may also damage the transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.

LDI3077
Check the power steering fluid level when the engine is stopped.
The fluid level should be between the COLD MAX line and the COLD MIN line on the power steering fluid reservoir at cold fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C) or at the HOT MAX line on the power steering fluid reservoir at hot fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C).

If the fluid is cold and is at or below the COLD MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to the COLD MAX line. If the fluid is hot and below the HOT MAX line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to the HOT MAX line. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.
CAUTION
· DO NOT OVERFILL. · Do not reuse power steering fluid. · Recommended fluid is Genuine
NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

Do-it-yourself 8-13

BRAKE FLUID

LDI3088
Brake fluid reservoir (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3532
Brake fluid reservoir (Type B) (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
· Clean the filler cap before removing. · Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake fluid is below the MIN line OB , the
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
brake fluid up to the MAX line OA . For addi-
tional information on recommended type of brake fluid, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

LDI2879
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the "Low Washer Fluid" warning message shows on the vehicle information display.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

CAUTION
· Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint.
· Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

· Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING

No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

Sparks

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

Keep away from children

Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

Battery acid

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

Note operating instructions

Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Explosive gas

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

· If the battery is labeled "do not open" it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery's performance.
· Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
· Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
· Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes before disconnecting the battery.
· If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
· Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
· Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

· When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
· Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
· This vehicle uses a special battery. If the 12-volt battery needs to be replaced, use a 12-volt battery of the same design.
· Keep battery out of the reach of children.
· Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

WDI0224
Battery (Type A) (if so equipped) 1. Remove the vent cap(s) with a screw-
driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. 2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent cap(s). Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
8-18 Do-it-yourself

WDI0529

LDI3302
Battery (Type B) (if so equipped) NOTE:
Do not try to open the top of the battery.
The Type B battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" (P. 6-10). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

DRIVE BELT

LDI2132
CAUTION
· Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
· Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

NOTE:
If the battery is dead the transmission will not manually shift into another position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

WDI0661
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) 1. Power steering fluid pump pulley 2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley 3. Water pump pulley 4. Cooling fan pulley 5. Air conditioner compressor pulley 6. Crankshaft pulley 7. Generator pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule. For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

LDI2972
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridiumtipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
· Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-20 Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

LDI2960
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)
WARNING
· Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

· Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push the tabs and pull the cover upward.
The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the tabs.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information on change intervals, see "Maintenance schedules" (P. 9-7).
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING

LDI2725

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push and hold the release tab OA , and then move the wiper blade down OB the
wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION
· After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
· Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.2

8-22 Do-it-yourself

BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information on the appropriate maintenance schedule regarding brake inspections, see "Maintenance schedules" (P. 9-7).

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2710
Be careful not to let anything get into the
washer nozzle OD . This may cause clogging
or improper windshieldwasher operation. If something gets into the nozzle, remove it
with a needle or small pin OC .

Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

FUSES

LDI2385
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box. When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
8-24 Do-it-yourself

LDI2962
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

LDI3073
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) (non-XD model)
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI3074
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) (XD model)

LDI0456
5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with a new fuse OB .
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2883
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the glove box.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

LDI2884
5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OA .

LDI2760
6. If the fuse is open OB , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OC .
7. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA into the slit OB of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Do-it-yourself 8-27

8-28 Do-it-yourself

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
· Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.
· Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
· Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
OC and OD .
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:
For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LDI2637

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
· Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

· Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
· High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
· Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

LDI2924
Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)
Replacing the fog light bulb
CAUTION
· High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
· When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.
· Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.

· Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.
NOTE:
The fog light is accessible in front of the front tire and behind the bumper.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
3. Disconnect the bulb connector.
4. Rotate the bulb OA counterclockwise
and remove.
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not touch the glass envelope.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL) (if so equipped)
For additional information on the DRL bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

LDI2925
Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) (Canada only)
Replacing the daytime running light bulb (Canada only)
NOTE:
The daytime running light is accessible in front of the front tire and behind the bumper.
1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

LDI2954
Daytime running light (if so equipped) (Canada only)
3. Disconnect the daytime running light bulb connector.
4. Rotate the daytime running light bulb
OA counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not touch the glass envelope.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
Low (Halogen) High (Halogen) Turn/Park Side marker Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* Low High Daytime running/Park Turn Side marker Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) (Canada only) Fog Daytime running Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Puddle light (if so equipped)* Rear combination light (Type A) (if so equipped)* Stop Backup (reversing) Turn/Tail Rear combination light (Type B) (if so equipped)* Stop Backup (reversing) Turn/Tail Cargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) Rear combination light (Type C) (if so equipped)* Stop Backup (reversing) Turn/Tail Cargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) High-mounted stop light* Stop Cargo (roof) Under rail bed light (if so equipped)* License plate light* Map light (if so equipped)* Room light* Footwell light (if so equipped)* Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* Glove box light (if so equipped)*

Wattage (W)
55 60 28/8 5 -- -- -- 28/8 -- 35 21 -- -- -- 16 16 27/7 -- 16 27/7 -- -- 16 21 16 -- -- -- -- 8 -- -- -- 3.4

Bulb No.*
H11 HB3 7444NA W5W
-- -- -- 7444NA -- H8 W21W -- -- -- PW16W 921 3057K -- 921 3057K -- -- W16W WY21W 921 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 158

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

7. High-mount stop light 8. Under rail bed light (if so equipped) 9. License plate light 10. Rear combination light

1. Headlight assembly 2. Map light (if so equipped) 3. Room light (if so equipped)

LDI2890
4. Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)
5. Puddle light (if so equipped) 6. Fog light (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-33

WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation
8-34 Do-it-yourself

NOTE:

Rear combination light

LDI2951

Rear combination light (Type B) (if so equipped) bulb replacement procedure is shown. Rear combination light (Type A) (if so equipped) bulb replacement procedure is similar.

To replace the rear combination light bulbs perform the following procedure:
1. Remove the two fasteners OA and pull
the rear combination light away from the vehicle.

LDI2952
Rear combination light
2. Remove harness connector and rotate
stop light bulb OB counterclockwise to
remove. Replace bulb if necessary.
3. Rotate reverse light bulb socket OC
counterclockwise to remove. Replace bulb if necessary.
4. Rotate cargo (tailgate) light bulb socket
OD (if so equipped) counterclockwise to
remove. Replace bulb if necessary.
5. Rotate turn/tail light bulb socket OE
counterclockwise to remove. Replace bulb if necessary. Reverse steps to install bulbs and rear combination light.

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all four tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5), and "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
· Most tires naturally lose air over time.
· Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, see "TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert" (P. 5-7).
Do-it-yourself 8-35

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
· Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.

· The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

· Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

hicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.
5 Tire size - see "Tire labeling"
(P. 8-39).
6 Spare tire size.

Tire and Loading Information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
2 Vehicle load limit: For additional
information, see "Vehicle loading information" (P. 10-22).
3 Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

LDI2926
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, ve-

Do-it-yourself 8-37

Checking tire pressure

LDI0393

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

3. Remove the gauge.

Size
Front Original Tire: 265/70R18 P265/70R18 P275/60R20 P275/70R18 LT245/75R17 LT275/65R18 LT265/60R20

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
270 kPa, 39 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi

8-38 Do-it-yourself

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
270 kPa, 39 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 500 kPa, 73 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 480 kPa, 70 psi
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure 270 kPa, 39 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 240 kPa, 35 psi 250 kPa, 36 psi 500 kPa, 73 psi 450 kPa, 65 psi 480 kPa, 70 psi

Example
TIRE LABELING

WDI0394

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

LDI2043

Example
O1 Tire size (example: LT215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This num-

95H)

ber, known as the aspect ratio,

1. LT: The "LT" indicates the tire is designed for light truck vehicles (not

gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

all tires have this information).

4. R: The "R" stands for radial.

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

LDI2786

Example
O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional).

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's

look on the other sidewall of the

identification mark.

tire.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

O3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.
O4 Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
O5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

O6 Term of "tubeless" or "tube type"
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").
O7 The word "radial"
The word "radial" is shown if the tire has radial structure.
O8 Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
· When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
· Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.
Do-it-yourself 8-41

· Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system and 4WD system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
8-42 Do-it-yourself

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating "M&S" on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class "S" chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads.

WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Non-XD models: 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models: 131 ft-lb (177 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
· Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
· Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
· After rotating the tires, do not use the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tire pressure. Instead use a gauge to adjust the tires to the correct pressure in accordance with Tire and Loading Information label.

Do-it-yourself 8-43

CAUTION To ensure proper operation of the EasyFill Tire Alert system after a tire rotation, re-set and register the sensor to their new installed locations. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark

WDI0259

WARNING
· Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.
· The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
· Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

8-44 Do-it-yourself

· Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35).

WARNING
· The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, 4WD, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
· If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

· If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. For additional information on wheel-off set dimensions, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 10-9).
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
Do-it-yourself 8-45

· When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. Contact a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
· Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
· Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
· Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.
· The use of retread tires is not recommended.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
8-46 Do-it-yourself

Four-wheel drive models
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
· For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
· Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
· Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
· Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
· Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
· NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full size spare that is a different size or brand than the tires originally installed on the vehicle. This full size spare tire is intended for temporary use only and should be replaced at the first opportunity.
Observe the following precautions if the FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
To help reduce the risk of a crash which may result in personal injury or death:
· The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
· Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. The vehicle driving performance may be affected when driving on wet or snow covered roads.

· When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare is installed, the following systems may not work correctly:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System
· Periodically check the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE inflated to the pressure specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
· With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
· When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire should be used on the front wheels and the original tire used on the rear wheels. Use tire chains only on the drive wheels.
· Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire on other vehicles.
· Do not use more than one TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the same time.

· TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire Limitations (except for Pro 4X) 50mph MAX Towing allowed
· Customer can identify TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire condition by checking the Tire and loading information label located on the B-pillar.
CAUTION
· Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
· Use of the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire on a vehicle that has tires larger than were originally equipped can affect the 4WD system. This may result in a circumference difference between tires on front and rear axles which can cause the 4WD system to automatically place the vehicle in 2WD and flash the 4WD light. When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire is replaces with a tire that matches all other tires on the vehicle, and all tires are properly inflated the 4WD system will operate normally

Do-it-yourself 8-47

MEMO
8-48 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-6 Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) . . . . . . . 9-7

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle's good mechanical condition, as well as it's emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are fully qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http:// collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the "Maintenance precautions" (P. 8-2).
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
WARNING
Failure to follow the procedures listed within this section may result in personal injury.
Additional information on the following items with " * " is found in the "Do-ityourself " section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Check that the gas stays or struts properly and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hatch in a fully open position. If the hood, trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, have the gas stays or struts replaced.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged wind-

shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for maintenance free batteries): For vehicles equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.
Battery* (for serviceable batteries): Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid should be at the bottom of the filler opening. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of

winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For additional information, see "Cleaning exterior" (P. 7-2).
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
Items marked with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be found in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, see "Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities"
(P. 10-2).

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE:
Drive Belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine Air Filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine Coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture for your area, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-6)).
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.
Engine Oil and Oil Filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).

Engine Valve Clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor Lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel Lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE:
Brake Lines and Cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake Pads and Rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust System: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-Cabin Microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.
Propeller Shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. (4WD/ AWD/RWD).
Steering Gear and Linkage, Axle and Suspension Parts, Drive Shaft Boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire Rotation: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission Fluid/Oil, Differential Oil, Transfer Case Oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.
Replace automatic transmission fluid at specified intervals.
If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:
· Replace the differential oil every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
· Replace the automatic transmission fluid ever 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Off-Road Maintenance: Check the following items frequently whenever you drive off-road through deep sand, mud or water:
· Brake pads and rotors
· Brake lines and hoses
· Differential, transmission and transfer case oil
· Steering linkage
· Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts
· Engine air filter
· Clutch housing drain (4WD only)

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
· Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles in normal temperatures or less than 10 miles in freezing temperatures.

· Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or low speed driving for long distances.
· Driving in dusty conditions or on rough, muddy or salt-spread roads.
· Towing a trailer, or using a camper or cartop carrier.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under the severe conditions, follow the severe maintenance intervals shown in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

5.6L 8 CYLINDER (VK56VD engine model)
The following shows the maintenance schedule.
Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

7,500 miles/(12,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/ 12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Differential gear oil · Propeller shaft · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/ 24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace differential gear oil · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only) · Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

22,500 miles/(36,000 km)/ 18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Intelligent key battery · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/ 30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ 24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Fuel tank vapor vent system * · Fuel lines/connections * · Exhaust system · Steering gear and linkage · Axle and suspension parts · Differential gear oil · Propeller shaft · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test

· Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace engine air filter (2) · Replace brake fluid · Replace In-cabin microfilter · Tire rotation · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)
Severe maintenance:
Essentials: · Replace automatic transmission fluid
(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

30,000 miles/(56,000 km)/ 36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Maintenance and schedules 9-13

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)

35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/ 42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

37,500 miles/(60,000 km)/ 30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/ 48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace differential gear oil · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only) · Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Propeller shaft · Differential gear oil · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Replace intelligent key batter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid.

45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/ 60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

52,500 miles/(84,000 km)/ 42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/ 66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ 48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belt * · Fuel tank vapor vent system * · Fuel lines/connections * · Exhaust system · Propeller shaft · Axle & suspension parts · Steering gear & linkage · Differential gear oil · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspection · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-19

60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ 72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only) · Replace differential gear oil · Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)

65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/ 78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

67,500 miles/(108,000 km)/ 54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace intelligent key battery · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/ 84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)

75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ 60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belt * · Propeller shaft · Differential gear oil · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspection · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-22 Maintenance and schedules

75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ 90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/ 96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-23

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace differential gear oil · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only) · Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)

82,500 miles/(132,000 km)/ 66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/ 102 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-24 Maintenance and schedules

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belt * · Fuel tank vapor vent system * · Fuel lines/connections * · Exhaust system · Propeller shaft · Steering gear and linkage · Axle and suspension parts · Differential gear oil · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspection · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

· Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine air filter (2) · Replace brake fluid · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Replace intelligent key battery · Tire rotation · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)
Severe maintenance:
Essentials: · Replace automatic transmission fluid (1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-25

90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 108 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)

95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/ 114 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-26 Maintenance and schedules

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

97,500 miles/(156,000 km)/ 78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/ 120 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-27

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Replace differential gear oil · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only) · Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)

105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belt * · Propeller shaft · Differential gear oil · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials: · Replace engine coolant * (2) · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace in-cabin microfilter · Replace spark plugs · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid.
(2) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-28 Maintenance and schedules

105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 126 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/ 132 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Maintenance and schedules 9-29

Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace brake fluid · Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-
els only)

112,500 miles/(180,000 km)/ 90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Propeller shaft · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine oil & filter · Replace intelligent key battery · Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/ 138 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections: · Brake pads & rotors · Steering gear & linkage · Axle & suspension parts · Propeller shaft · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Exhaust system · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Engine drive belt and hose inspections · Engine air filter · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods) · Differential gear oil · Battery terminals and cables, battery test · Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

9-30 Maintenance and schedules

Essentials:
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)

120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/ 96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: · Automatic transmission fluid (1) · Brake lines and cables · Brake pads and rotors · Engine drive belt * · Fuel tank vapor vent system * · Fuel lines/connections * · Exhaust system · Propeller shaft · Steering gear and linkage · Axle and suspension parts · Differential gear oil · Transfer case oil (4WD models) · Drive shaft boots (4WD models) · Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports · All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant) · Hose inspections · Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)

· Battery terminals and cables, battery test
· Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essentials: · Replace engine air filter (2)
· Replace brake fluid
· Replace engine oil & filter
· Replace in-cabin microfilter
· Tire rotation
· Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD models only)
Severe maintenance:
Essentials:
· Replace automatic transmission fluid
· Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)
· Replace differential gear oil
(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 77000, replace the AT fluid.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-31

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-18 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Utili-track® channel system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Rear assist step (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Crew cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Special Body vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the "Do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Fuel

Engine oil *1 Drain and refill *1 For additional information, see "Changing engine oil and oil filter " (P. 8-7).

With oil filter
change
Without oil filter change

Engine coolant with reservoir

Non-XD model
XD model

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)

Differential gear oil

Front Rear

Non-XD model
XD model
Non-XD model
XD model

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

98.4 L

26 gal

21-5/8 gal

6.5 L

6-7/8 qt

5-3/4 qt

6.2 L
13.4 L 13.2 L

6-1/2 qt
3-1/2 gal 3-1/2 gal

5-1/2 qt
3 gal 2-7/8 gal

1.25 L 1.51 L 2.3 L 2.6 L

2-5/8 pt 3-1/4 pt 4-7/8 pt 5-1/2 pt

2-1/4 pt 2-5/8 pt
4 pt 4-5/8 pt

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· For additional information, see "Fuel recommendation" (P. 10-4).
· Genuine "NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN" (or equivalent) is recommended. · If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" (P. 10-7).
· Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
· Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF or equivalent · NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic GL-5 75W-85. · NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic GL-5 75W-85 ONLY in final drive. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic GL-5 75W-85 may damage the differential gear. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type

Transfer fluid

Non-XD model XD model

Power Steering Fluid (PSF)

Brake fluid

Multi-purpose grease

Air conditioning system refrigerant

Air conditioning system oil Windshield-washer fluid

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

1.5 L

1-5/8 qt

1-3/8 qt

1.8 L -- -- -- --

1-7/8 qt -- -- -- --

1-5/8 qt -- -- -- --

-- 4.5 L

-- 1-1/4 gal

-- 1 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M or equivalent · Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M (or equivalent) may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer. Damage caused by fluids other than as recommended is not covered by the NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent.
· Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *2 or equivalent DOT 3. *2 Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
· NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) (or equivalent).
· HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) (or equivalent). · For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-8).
· Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (VC100yf oil). · For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-8).
· Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
· Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
· Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

· Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
· U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
· The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
· If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)
· E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

· If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.
E15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy "spark knock." ("Spark knock" is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

LTI2051
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in "Change intervals."

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:
· repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
· driving in dusty conditions
· extensive idling
· towing a trailer
· stop and go commuting

For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG (VC100yf oil) or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil may cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and may require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be service by trained and certified technicians to ensure proper and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts.
A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed A/T (in "N" position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90° in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92) cu in (cm 3) 338.78 (5,552) 18736542
No adjustment is necessary.
DILKAR7B11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Steel
Alloy Tire type Passenger
Light truck

Offset in (mm) 1.73 (44) 0.98 (25) 0.98 (25) 0.91 (23) 1.63 (41.5) 0.91 (23) 1.63 (41.5) Performance type All season All season All season All terrain All season All terrain All season

Size 17 x 7.5 J 18 x 8.0 J 18 x 8.0 J 18 x 8.0 J 18 x 7.5 J 20 x 8.0 J 20 x 7.5 J Size 265/70R18 P265/70R18 P275/60R20 P275/70R18 LT245/75R17 LT275/65R18 LT265/60R20

Spare wheel type Full size (Matching) Steel
Full size (Non Matching) Steel
Full size (Non Matching) Alloy
Full size (Matching) Alloy

Performance type
-
-

Size
LT245/75R17
265/70R18 P265/70R18 P275/70R18 P275/60R20 LT245/75R17 P275/60R20 LT265/60R20 P275/70R18 P275/60R20 LT265/60R20 LT275/65R18

10-10 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Non-XD crew cab models
Overall Length: Without front license plate bracket:
With license plate bracket:
Overall width: Tow mirrors non-extended: Tow mirrors extended: Without overfenders:

Overall height:

With overfenders:

Models
S, SV, SL and Platinum Pro-4X S, SV, SL and Platinum Canada: Pro-4X USA: Pro-4X
2WD: S, SV and SL 4WD: S, SV, SL and Platinum Canada Pro-4X
Pro-4X and Platinum
2WD: S/SV 4WD: S/SV 2WD: SL/Platinum 4WD: Pro-4X/SL/Platinum

Units: in (mm)
228.0 (5791.5) 228.9 (5812.7) 228.2 (5795.1) 228.2 (5795.1) 229.5 (5828.5)
98.2 (2,494) 103.9 (2,640)
79.5 (2,018.5) 79.5 (2,018.5) 79.5 (2,018.5)
80.7 (2,049.6)
75.4 (1,915.1) 76.0 (1,930) 75.6 (1,920.4) 77.2 (1,961)

Technical and consumer information 10-11

Front Track:

Rear Track:

Wheelbase: Gross vehicle weight rating: Gross axle weight rating:

Front: Rear:

Models
USA: S and SV USA: SL, Pro-4X and Platinum Canada: S, SV, Pro-4X and Platinum
USA: S and SV USA: SL, Pro-4X and Platinum Canada: S, SV, Pro-4X and Platinum

Units: in (mm)
67.9 (1,725) 68.1 (1,729) 68.1 (1,730)
67.9 (1,725) 68.1 (1,729) 68.1 (1,729) 139.8 (3,550)
Refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label" on the center pillar between the driver's side front and rear doors.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

XD crew cab models
Overall Length: Without front license plate bracket:
With front license plate bracket:
Overall width: Tow mirrors non-extended: Tow mirrors extended: Without overfenders: With overfenders:
Overall height:
Front Track:

Models
S, SV, SL and Platinum Pro-4X
S, SV, SL and Platinum Pro-4X
S, SV and SL Pro-4X and Platinum
S SV Pro-4X SL/Platinum
S and SV SL, Pro-4X and Platinum

Units: in (mm)
242.8 (6,168.2) 243.6 (6,187.2)
243.4 (6,181.8) 244.4 (6,208.5)
98.2 (2,494) 103.9 (2,640) 79.5 (2,018.5) 80.7 (2,049.6)
78.0 (1981.6) 78.0 (1982.4) 78.4 (1,992.3) 78.9 (2,002.8)
68.4 (1,738) 68.6 (1,743)

Technical and consumer information 10-13

Rear Track:

Wheelbase: Gross vehicle weight rating: Gross axle weight rating:

Front: Rear:

Models
S and SV SL, Pro-4X and Platinum

Units: in (mm)
68.4 (1,737) 68.6 (1,742) 151.6 (3,850)
Refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label" on the center pillar between the driver's side front and rear doors.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Non-XD King Cab® models
Overall Length: Without front license plate bracket:

With front license plate bracket:

Overall width: Overall height:

Without overfenders: With overfenders:

Front Track:

Models
S and SV Pro-4X
S and SV Pro-4X
S and SV Pro-4X
2WD: S 4WD: S 2WD: SV 4WD: SV
Pro-4X
S and SV Pro-4X

Units: in (mm)
228.0 (5,791.5) 228.9 (5,812.7)
228.2 (5,795.1) 229.5 (5,828.5)
79.5 (2,018.5) 80.7 (2,049.6)
75.1 (1,908) 75.7 (1,923) 75.1 (1,908) 75.7 (1,923) 76.9 (1,953)
67.9 (1,725) 68.1 (1,729)
Technical and consumer information 10-15

Rear Track:

Wheelbase: Gross vehicle weight rating: Gross axle weight rating:

Front: Rear:

Models
S and SV Pro-4X

Units: in (mm)
67.9 (1,725) 68.1 (1,729) 139.8 (3,550)
Refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label" on the center pillar between the driver's side front and rear doors.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

LTI2195
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

LTI0086
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

WTI0095
5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The engine serial number is stamped on the engine as shown.

LTI0135
Type A (if so equipped)
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

WTI0099
Type B (if so equipped)
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

XD models
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

LTI2197

LTI2242
Except XD models
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI2480
Type A (if so equipped)
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL

Technical and consumer information 10-19

LTI2196
Type B (if so equipped)
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

LTI2198
XD models
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

LTI2243
Except XD models
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Symbol Name Caution

Reference ISO 7000 0434

Graphic

Air Conditioning System (MAC)

ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAGPOE)

Requires Registered Technician to Service MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2230
Pro-4X Use the following steps to mount the front license plate: 1. Attach the license plate bracket on the
skid plate at the location marked (small dimple) using self-tapping screws.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Except Pro-4x

LTI2225

LTI2226
Except Pro-4x Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:
1. Install two grommets OA into the square
holes in the front bumper.
2. Install the license plate bracket to the front bumper with two tapping screws
OB .

WARNING
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
· Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
· GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
· GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

· GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
· GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
· Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.
· Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, see "Measurement of weights" (P. 10-33).
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Example
Steps for determining correct load limit
10-24 Technical and consumer information

LTI2320

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, see "Measurement of weights" (P. 10-33).
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-37).

LTI2481
SECURING THE LOAD
For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box.

WARNING
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

Technical and consumer information 10-25

LTI0107
UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (if so equipped)
1. Side channels
2. Header channel
3. Channel sections
4. Floor channels

WARNING
· Properly install and tighten the tiedown cleats into the Utili-track® channel system. Also, do not attach any rope or straps directly to the channel. Failure to properly install the tie-down cleats or attaching ropes or straps directly to the channel can cause the cargo to become unsecured. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
NOTE:
If the bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) are installed on the vehicle, use the cleats in the side channel locations. For additional information on bed liner storage bins, see "Storage" (P. 2-69).

The Utili-track® channel system allows you to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the best location to secure a load.
The tie-down cleats must be installed so the clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches, it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 40 in-lbs.)
Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat periodically during a trip to make sure the center bolt has not become loose.
Install the tie-down cleat as follows:
1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed. Properly store the channel protectors.
2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

LTI0103
3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicular to the channel as shown. Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the desired location.
LTI0104
4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom fully seat into the channel detents.
5. There should be no gap between the bottom of the cleat and the top of the channel. Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40 in-lbs.).
Technical and consumer information 10-27

WTI0124
10-28 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION
· Install only one cleat per section of channel.
· Applying loads at angles to the cleats greater than 45° or loads greater than 150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or 200 lbs. (side channels) may cause damage to the channel or bed.

LTI0106
Technical and consumer information 10-29

1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation WARNING Do not install accessories over the gap between the front and rear side channels. Doing this could affect the rear structure in certain rear impacts, which could result in serious injury.
10-30 Technical and consumer information

LTI0123

LTI2520
REAR ASSIST STEP (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· The rear assist step maximum weight capacity is 300 lbs. (136 kg). Applying more than 300 lbs. (136 kg) may damage the step.
Push the rear assist step to extend step. Pull the rear assist step to retract step.

LOADING TIPS · The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label. · Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

· Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
· Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle's warranty.

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING INFORMATION
CREW CAB MODELS
Crew Cab short wheel base models should not be used to carry a slide-in camper.
KING CAB® MODELS
This information is provided for you to properly install a slide-in camper and is based on the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations. It is recommended that, before installing the camper, you carefully read the following information and ensure that the camper meets the specifications.
This information may not apply to some Canada model vehicles.
SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES
Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies. However, this Owner's Manual does not cover these options. For additional information, refer to the body manufacturer's instruction manual.

Technical and consumer information 10-31

WARNING
Improper loading may be dangerous. If a load is too far back, it can affect handling characteristics. If a load is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded.

WTI0195
LOCATION FOR CENTER OF GRAVITY
The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location. Crew Cab Non-XD models: L1 = 33.8 in (858 mm) Crew Cab XD models: L1 = 47.2 in (1,200 mm) King Cab® Non-XD models: L1 = 39.6 in (1,005 mm)
10-32 Technical and consumer information

LTI0129
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the camper manufacturer's weight figure,
· the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the camper manufacturer's weight figure,
· the weight of camper cargo,
· and the weight of passengers in the camper.

TOWING A TRAILER

The total cargo load should not exceed the truck's cargo weight rating and the camper's center of gravity should fall within the truck's recommended center of gravity zone when installed.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.
VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY
The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on the Tire and Loading Information label indicates the maximum total weight of passengers, optional equipment (air conditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargo that your vehicle is designed to carry.
For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-37).
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, see "Vehicle loading information" (P. 10-22).
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-37).

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label that is located on the left side of the vehicle, normally the dash, hinge pillar, door latch post, or door edge next to the driver. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
· Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
· For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier load.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.

Technical and consumer information 10-33

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the "Towing load/ specification" chart (P. 10-37). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.
· When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used.
The maximum GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following "Towing load/specification" chart (P. 10-37).

LTI0161
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

10-34 Technical and consumer information

Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-12).
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

King pin load
When using a 5th wheel hitch, keep the tongue load between 15 - 25% of the total trailer load within the maximum king pin load limits shown in the following "Towing load/specification" chart. If the king pin load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper king pin load.

WTI0160
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following "Towing load/ specification" chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

CA0036
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
Technical and consumer information 10-35

Towing with Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch
The Class 4 towing capacities shown in the towing load specification charts are calculated per the SAE J2807 standards. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.
Towing with Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.
To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the "Towing load/specification" chart found in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
Example:
· Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg).
· Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg).

10-36 Technical and consumer information

· Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from "Towing load/specification" chart 19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg).
· Maximum Trailer towing capacity from "Towing load/specification" chart - 9,200 lbs. (4,173 kg).

8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg) 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg)
= 1,186 lbs. (538 kg)

GVWR
GVW
Available for tongue/king pin
weight

19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg)

GCWR

7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg)

GVW

= 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Capacity available for towing

1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Available capacity
= 10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue weight specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue weight becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue weight. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the "Towing load/specification" chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10%, shift the trailer load forward until the trailer tongue weight reaches 10% of the trailer weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this manual are for general reference only. The safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed the published maximum towing capacity or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage.
NOTE:
The SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch specifications are based on S and SV grade models . The Gooseneck Hitch specifications are based on SV grade models.

Technical and consumer information 10-37

Non-XD models -- Crew cab -- Towing load specification chart -- SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

2WD 1,590 lbs. (721.2 kg) 9,360 lbs. (4,245.6 kg) 936 lbs. (424.6 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

4WD 1,640 lbs. (743.9 kg) 9,220 lbs. (4,182.1 kg) 922 lbs. (418.2 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

Non-XD models -- King Cab® -- Towing load specification chart -- SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type Maximum Payload Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

2WD 1,610 lbs. (730.3 kg) 9,380 lbs. (4,254.7 kg) 938 lbs. (425.5 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

4WD 1,690 lbs. (766.6 kg) 9,260 lbs. (4,200.3 kg)
926 lbs. (420 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

XD models -- Crew cab -- Towing load specification chart -- SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum Tongue load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4

4WD 2,440 lbs. (1,106.8 kg) 10,930 lbs. (4,957.8 kg)
1,093 lbs. (495.8 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models -- Crew cab -- Towing load specification chart -- Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type
Maximum Payload
Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3
Maximum King pin load *2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4

4WD 2,440 lbs. (1,106.8 kg) 11,040 lbs. (5,007.7 kg)
1,656 lbs. (751.1 kg)
17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity. *2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). *3: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) and 500 lbs. (227 kg) tongue load. *4: The maximum gross combined weight rating for XD vehicles equipped with 20 inch wheels is 16,900 lbs. (7,666 kg).

10-38 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available at a NISSAN dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available at a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

A hitch used for towing 5th wheel and gooseneck trailers can also be installed on your vehicle. Contact a professional supplier of towing equipment to purchase and have a 5th wheel or gooseneck hitch installed.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer: · The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball. · Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.

· The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16" smaller than the hole in the ball mount.
· The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Technical and consumer information 10-39

Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or "dead weight" ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver.

LTI2227
Bumper towing
The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has provisions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
NOTE:
The trailer hitch ball cannot be installed on the step bumper if the receiver-type frame mounted hitch is installed on the vehicle.
To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle
in the center of the step bumper OA , then
remove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a "loadleveling" or "equalizing" hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can't carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system.

10-40 Technical and consumer information

NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.

Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).
Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
Class IV hitch
Class IV hitches are weight carrying (WC) and weight distributing (WD) hitches depending on the vehicle and hitch specifications. Not all Class IV hitches are rated to be both. See the specific hitch for that information. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) used as weight carrying are rated up to 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with a maximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of

1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Class IV hitches used for weight distributing are rated up to 14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with a maximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of 1,400 lbs. (635 kg). A Class IV hitch usually has a 2" square receiver opening. A higher class drawbar does not increase the towing capacity of the hitch. To use this class of hitch for weight distribution requires a weight distribution system. Class IV hitches attach to the vehicle frame only. A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV weigh distributing trailer hitch that has a 14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the "Towing load/specification" chart in this section.
5th wheel/gooseneck
A 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can be towed by installing a 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer hitch. These types of hitches are mounted in the bed of the pick-up. A professional trailer equipment supplier

Technical and consumer information 10-41

should install these hitches as it is very important to mount the hitch correctly to distribute the king pin weight for the proper load carrying and sway control performance.
The king pin weight should be 15% of the fully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pin weight does not cause the gross vehicle weight to exceed the Gross Maximum Weight Rating or the rear axle weight to exceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating. For additional information, see "Maximum load limits" (P. 10-34).
The weight of the trailer should not exceed the maximum towing capacity for the vehicle. For additional information, see "Towing load/specification" chart (P. 10-37).
Make sure the trailer design allows for the correct vehicle to trailer clearances before purchasing a 5th wheel trailer.

WARNING
· The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
· Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
· Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.
· To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the receiver when not in use.
· Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.
· When towing with the hitch ball mounted to the rear bumper, do not make sharp turns. The trailer may contact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer.
· When towing a 5th wheel trailer, do not make sharp turns while driving or backing. The trailer may contact the vehicle and cause damage to both the trailer and vehicle.

LTI2305
CAUTION
· A 5th wheel hitch adapter is necessary to use an aftermarket 5th wheel hitch. A Genuine NISSAN 5th wheel hitch adapter (as shown) may be available at a NISSAN dealer.
· Ensure kit components are properly stored when not in use. Improperly stowed components could result in serious personal injury during a collision or sudden stop.

10-42 Technical and consumer information

Gooseneck hitch ball and safety chain anchor attachment installation
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the gooseneck hitch ball and safety chain anchor attachments from the storage pouch.

LTI2209
3. Remove the center and both of the rear caps from the puck plugs.
· Once removed, place the pucks in the storage pouch for future use.

LTI2160
4. Lift the handle from the center of the hitch ball and rotate 90° from the resting position.

Technical and consumer information 10-43

LTI2210
5. Position the ball bearings to the sides of the truck bed and Insert the gooseneck hitch ball into the center receiver tube of the truck bed.

LTI2164
6. Rotate the handle 90° seat the handle back to the original resting position. If the handle does not seat fully, rotate the hitch ball until the handle drops into the original resting position.

LTI2211
7. Place the safety chain anchor attachments into the q-turn pucks.

10-44 Technical and consumer information

Tire pressures · When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
· Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer's specifications.

LTI2212
8. Rotate the safety chain anchor attachments 90° until the center of the anchor seats into place.

NOTE:

LTI2192

Removal of the gooseneck hitch ball and safety chain anchor attachments are in the reverse order of installation. To remove safety chain anchor attachment,
lift the centerO1 , rotate 90°, and lift
safety chain anchor attachment away.

Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

Technical and consumer information 10-45

Trailer lights

Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers.

CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stop light and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/ converter must draw no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle's electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.

Trailer brakes (if so equipped)
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.
Vehicles equipped with a 7pin trailer harness connector are pre-wired for a trailer brake controller. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake adapter harness.
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.
WARNING
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) must never exceed the vehicle manufacturers recommendation.
Several types of braking systems are available.

10-46 Technical and consumer information

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
CAUTION
Your factory trailer brake control unit will not activate surge-style trailer brakes
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are used, see "Electric trailer brake controller" (P. 10-49).
Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing.

WARNING
The NISSAN trailer brake controller has been verified to be compatible with trailers having electric actuated drum brakes (one to four axles) and electricover-hydraulic brakes. It will not activate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes

To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the rearmost position.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

LTI0117
example
Electric trailer brake controller (if so equipped)
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may require the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.

Technical and consumer information 10-47

LTI0122
2. Apply the parking brake to access the jumper harness connector.
3. Locate the jumper harness connector under the lower portion of the instrument panel. The connector is taped to
the wiring harness OA as indicated.
Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR RED/GREEN
BLACK BROWN/WHITE RED/BLUE RED

LTI2228
NOTE
Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller.
Brake controller ground (-).
Trailer brake controller switched output.
Trailer brake controller illumination.
Fused trailer brake controller battery feed (B+).

LTI2229
4. Peel off the tape and connect the
jumper harness to the connector OB .
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer's instructions.

10-48 Technical and consumer information

1 Gain 2 Gain + 3 Manual control lever 4 Boost

LTI2157

Trailer brake controller unit (if so equipped)
The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), located on the lower instrument panel, is a device that assists the vehicle in having effective and smooth braking while towing a trailer.

Operating modes:
· Automatic mode: This is the normal operation of the TBCU depending on the gain and boost settings adjusted by the customer. This mode will activate when vehicle brake pedal is pressed.
· Manual mode: This mode is initiated by adjusting the manual control lever from resting position. This mode will provide output power to trailer brakes without applying the vehicle brake pedal.
To determine the output operation of the system:
· Gain + and Gain - : Used to increase or decrease the braking force supplied to the trailer brakes. To adjust the gain, press Gain + or Gain - to the desired point (0-10). For example: gain setting 6.0 is a typical starting point for heavy loads.
· Boost: Used to adjust the feel of the automatic brake event that occurs when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. To set up boost, press Boost button once to display for current boost setting (display for 3 seconds). Keep pressing to increase boost level until the desired level (0-3) is achieved.

· Manual Control Lever: Provides brake output power to trailer brakes without applying the vehicle brake pedal. The amount of brake output supplied corresponds to the amount of pinch pressure applied to the manual control lever.

Technical and consumer information 10-49

Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*)
Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not engaged
Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not engaged
Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected

Gain feature is adjustable from

by increments of

*If sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service

Boost off Boost level 1 Boost level 2 Boost level 3

10-50 Technical and consumer information

LTI2156
This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to the vehicle size.

WARNING
Do not exceed Gross Combined Weight Rating (GVWR). For additional information about GVWR, see "Towing load/ specification" (P. 10-37).
Pre-towing tips
· Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nosedown condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
· Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
· Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.
· Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.
· Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 10-51

· Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
· Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.
· Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
· Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
· Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
· Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
· Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.

· When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the

indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is

in 4H, 4LO, or 2H and that the ATP light is

off. If the

indicator light is flashing,

or the ATP light is ON, make sure the

transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and turn

the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For addi-

tional information, see "Automatic

transmission park warning light" (P. 2-13)

and "Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)" (P. 5-105).

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

10-52 Technical and consumer information

· While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides "engine braking" and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
· If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-12).
· Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.
· Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km).
· For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).
· Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified. For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
· When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.

· Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Trailer Sway Assist:
To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle may apply braking to individual wheels based on input from your vehicle sensors and vehicle speed. Trailer sway control is a function of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system and is active when the VDC function is enabled.
CAUTION
If the VDC-OFF switch is on (meaning VDC system OFF), the Trailer Sway Assist is also disabled
When Trailer Sway Assist is in operation, the VDC warning light blinks. When vehicle control is regained, VDC warning light will turn OFF.
For additional information about the VDC system, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch" (P. 2-57) and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-118).

If Trailer Sway Assist activates, do the following:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle
CAUTION
Do not try to correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced. For additional information, see "Pre-towing tips" (P. 10-51).
NOTE:
Trailer Sway Assist cannot reduce trailer sway in all situations. · Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.

Technical and consumer information 10-53

· Use the Tow Mode or downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.
· Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
· Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
· NISSAN recommends that the cruise control (if so equipped) not be used while towing a trailer.
· While towing a trailer, do not use the following systems (if so equipped): the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) system the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system

the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system
the Cross Traffic Alert system the Rear Sonar system
· Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.
· Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
· When launching a boat, don't allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.
· Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/ fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

Tow mode
Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when tow mode is selected. Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is turned off.
Tow mode includes the following features:
· Grade logic -- Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade.
· Downhill Speed Control (DSC) -- automatically downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed.
Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

10-54 Technical and consumer information

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/ fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.
FLAT TOWING FOR 2-WHEEL DRIVE (2WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
· Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
· Never flat tow your 2WD vehicle. · Never tow your 2WD vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
· DO NOT tow your 2WD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

· For emergency towing procedures see "Towing recommended by NISSAN" (P. 6-13).
FLAT TOWING FOR 4-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
· Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
· Never flat tow your 4WD vehicle. · DO NOT tow your 4WD vehicle with
any wheels on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
· For emergency towing procedures see "Towing recommended by NISSAN" (P. 6-13).

Automatic Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.

Technical and consumer information 10-55

SNOW PLOW

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

NISSAN does not make a snowplow for TITAN and has not evaluated the suitability of its trucks for use as snowplow platforms. Instead, the snowplow manufacturers establish minimum vehicle requirements for their various plow products and they make the determination as to which vehicle platforms are suitable, based on their individual product specifications. Consult the snowplow manufacturers and sellers concerning the fitness of the TITAN for use with their products. NISSAN advises caution whenever installing aftermarket parts and accessories because these products have not been tested or certified by NISSAN. Please reference the NISSAN Body Builder's guide for the appropriate upfit capacities and requirements of the TITAN XD `Snowplow Prep' package (if so equipped) or `HD Front GAWR' Package (if so equipped).

WARNING
· Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle handling. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in vehicle damage, serious injury, or death.
· A snowplow attached may affect the operation of the air bags. Use extreme caution while driving and plowing to avoid vehicle damage, serious injury, or death.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

10-56 Technical and consumer information

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
· Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
· Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

Technical and consumer information 10-57

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm (English speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/ fra/securiteautomobile/menu.htm (French speakers)
Or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1
Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada's Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers).

10-58 Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.

WARNING
A vehicle equipped with 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the "ready condition" for an Inspection/ Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the "ready condition" when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a "not ready" condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is "not ready". If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready". It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the "ready condition" or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

Technical and consumer information 10-59

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
· Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner's Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

10-60 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

A
Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-49 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75 Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . .1-82 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-82, 2-16 Air bag warning light, supplemental. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82, 2-16 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . .4-32, 4-38 Air conditioner specification label . .10-20 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-42 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Alarm system (See vehicle security system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . .2-13 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-116 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . .2-83 Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-31 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-21 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127, 8-16 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-27
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-16 Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Blind Spot Warning (BSW). . . . . . . . . .5-32

Block heater Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-116 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-32 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-115 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Brake wear indicators. . . . . . .2-22, 8-23 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-23 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Brake Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-115 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-103 Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-13 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
C
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-18 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-88 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22

Cargo light switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-34 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-30
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . .1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-49 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Climate control seat switch. . . . . . . . .2-52 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-127 Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-38 Heater and air conditioner controls (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49, 5-50 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78
D
Daytime Running Light System. . .2-49, 8-30
11-2

Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-50 Display
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-127 Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-10 Driving the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Dual power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85
E
Eco Drive Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-113 Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-105 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-112 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-15, 6-2 Emission control information label . . . .10-19 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-57 Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-128 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6

Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-10 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-8 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
F
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Fluid Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-15
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75 Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . .5-122 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-6 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69 Fuel
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-105 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-32 Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) System Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-104 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . .2-89, 2-90, 2-92, 2-93 Gauge
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-10 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-79
H
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11 Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-43 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Headlights, aiming control . . . . . . . . .2-49 Heated rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-56

Heater Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-38 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-39
Heater and air conditioner (automatic). .4-37 Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-58 Hill descent control system . . . . . . . .5-121 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-122 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . .2-89, 2-90, 2-92, 2-93 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Hook
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
I
Ignition switch Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-12
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-16 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-105 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-31 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-50 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-4 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-50 Intelligent Around View Monitor. . . . . . .4-11 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-51 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-101

11-3

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89 Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12 Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-15 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-18
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-27 Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-15 Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-9 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
L
Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-20
11-4

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-18 Emission control information label . .10-19 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-19 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-17 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-82 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . .5-27 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 License plate Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-21 Light Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-82, 2-16 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-32 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-13 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-32 Fog light switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-43 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-43 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-63 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89 Lock Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-9 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-16, 2-20, 2-32 Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80
M
Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . .2-15, 2-20 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89 Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69 Memory seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40, 3-42

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-10 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50
Mirror Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-31 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 7-5 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-23
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-9 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-16 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-75 Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12 Owner's manual order form. . . . . . . .10-60 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60
P
Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-114
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Personal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89 Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64, 2-66 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-115 Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64, 2-66 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-115 Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-49

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . .1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-49 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16 Precautions on supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 1-68 Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-10 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
R
Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-59 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-75 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-41 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 2-63 Rear power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) System . . .4-43 Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85 Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . . . .2-61 Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-8
11-5

Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 5-17 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-58
S
Safety Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-9 Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-49 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-58
Seat Memory seat . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40, 3-42
Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-6
Seat belt Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26 Injured person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16, 7-7 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-19
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70
11-6

Seats Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-16 Security systems
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-37 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-60 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Shifting
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-20 Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . .1-24 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78 Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-56 Spark plug replacement. . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-6 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-118 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-18 Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-10

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Steering Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-115 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-69 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 7-5 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-82 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82, 2-16 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels. . . . .1-82 Precautions on supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 1-68 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-53 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Automatic power window switch . . .2-83 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Fog light switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Headlight aiming control. . . . . . . . .2-49 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-43

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-43 Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . .2-58 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-61 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-16 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40 Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-46 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-19 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43 Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . .8-46 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-56 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-35, 10-10 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5, 6-3 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Towing
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-55 Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-37 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) . . . . . . . .5-24 Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) . . . .2-63 Transceiver HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . .2-89, 2-90, 2-92, 2-93 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . .5-106 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . .10-31 Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
U
Under seat storage bin . . . . .2-70, 2-74, 2-75 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-56 USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-42 Using 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-105

V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-19 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-118 Vehicle identification. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-17 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-38, 5-16 Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . .2-22 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-22 Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15, 6-16 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 5-16 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
W
Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-82, 2-16 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-13 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-14
11-7

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-32 Low fuel warning light. . . .2-16, 2-20, 2-32 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-63 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82, 2-16 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . .2-37 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-82 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Warning systems switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-11 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . .8-35, 10-10 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81 Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-83 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83
11-8

Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . .2-85 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Wiper Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-40

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
· Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
· Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2)
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-35).
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, see "Break-in schedule" (P. 5-103). Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : June 2020 Publication No.: OM21EA 0A61U0
Printed in the U.S.A.

A61-D

Acrobat Distiller 20.0 (Windows)